2009 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii
Preface
Read this manual from beginning to
end to learn about the vehicle’s
features and controls. Pictures,
symbols, and words work together
to explain vehicle operation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès de
concessionnaire ou à l’adresse
suivante:
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
SATURN, the SATURN Emblem,
and the name OUTLOOK are
registered trademarks of Saturn
Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS
and GM are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Index
This manual includes the latest
information at the time it was
printed. Saturn reserves the right to
make changes after that time
without further notice.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15919281 B Second Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Preface
Vehicle Symbol Chart
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
: : Oil Pressure
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the index.
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
. : Fuel Gage
+ : Fuses
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
g : Audio Steering Wheel
Controls or OnStar®
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
" : Charging System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have
adjustable head restraints in all
outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal
injury in a crash. Do not drive
until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the release button, located on
the head restraint post on the top of
the seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-3
Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide
the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move
the seat with your body to be
sure the seat is locked in place.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION
Seat Height Adjuster
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the vehicle has a manual driver
seat height adjuster, it is located on
the outboard side of the seat. See
information. To raise the seat, move
the lever upward repeatedly until the
seat is at the desired height. To lower
the seat, move the lever downward
repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height.
A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See
page 1-3.
C. Manual Reclining Seatback
Lever. See Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-8.
If the vehicle has a manual bucket
seat you can adjust the seat
forward or rearward with the bar
located under the front of the seat
cushion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Seats and Restraint System
Move the seat forward or rearward
by sliding the power seat adjustment
control (A) forward or rearward.
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
The vehicle may have additional
features to adjust the power seat:
•
Raise or lower the entire
seat by moving the power
seat adjustment control (A)
up or down.
•
•
Raise or lower the front part of the
seat cushion by moving the front
of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the rear part of the
seat cushion by moving the rear
of the control up or down.
Driver Seat with Power Seat
Control, Power Recline, and
Power Lumbar shown
If the vehicle has this feature, the
handle is located on the inboard side
of the seatback. See Manual
information.
The vehicle may have a memory
function which allows seat settings
to be saved and recalled. See
page 1-6 for more information.
A. Power Seat Adjustment Control
page 1-8.
Turn the handle rearward to
decrease lumbar support. Turn the
handle forward to increase lumbar
support.
If the vehicle has power seats, the
controls are located on the
outboard side of the seats.
The lumbar support may need to be
adjusted when changing the
seating position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-5
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If the seats have power lumbar, the
controls used to operate this feature
are located on the outboard side of
the seats. See “Power Lumbar”
more information.
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls are located on the
center console. To operate
the heated seats the engine must
be running.
If the vehicle has remote vehicle
start and is started using the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the front
heated seats will be turned on to the
high setting if it is cold outside.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under
When the ignition is turned on, the
heated seat feature will turn off.
To turn the heated seat feature back
on, press the desired button.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to
turn on the heated seatback.
To increase or decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the front or
rear of the control (C).
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to turn on or off the
heated seat and seatback.
Release the control when the
seatback reaches the desired level
of lumbar support.
The light on the button will come on
to indicate that the feature is on.
Each time the button is pressed, the
temperature settings change from
high, to medium, to low, to off.
Indicator lights above the button
will show the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and
one for low.
The lumbar support may need to be
adjusted when changing the
seating position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Seats and Restraint System
To save positions in memory:
To recall the memory positions, the
vehicle must be in P (Park). Press
and release either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the
desired driving position. The seat
and outside mirrors will move to the
position previously stored. You will
hear a single beep.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
1. Adjust the driver seat, including
the seatback recliner and both
outside mirrors to a comfortable
position.
page 2-32 for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the
ability to save and recall
the mirror positions.
Using the RKE transmitter to enter
the vehicle, with the remote recall
memory feature on, causes
2. Press and hold button 1 until two
beeps let you know that the
position has been stored.
automatic seat and mirror
adjustment. There is no adjustment
when the position has not been
changed by another seating position
or the easy exit feature. See
“MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under
information.
On vehicles with the memory
package, the controls for this feature
are located on the driver door
panel. The controls are used to
program and recall memory settings
for the driver seat and outside
mirrors.
A second seating and mirror
position can be programmed by
repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-7
To stop recall movement of the
memory feature at any time, press
one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, or power mirror
buttons.
Further programming for the
Easy Exit Seat
memory seat feature can be done
using the DIC. You can select
or cancel the following:
The control for this feature is
located on the driver door panel
between buttons 1 and 2.
•
The automatic easy exit seat
feature.
With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit
position can be recalled by pressing
the exit button. You will hear a single
beep. The driver seat will move back.
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling a memory
position, the driver seat recall may
stop working. If this happens, press
the appropriate control for the area
that is not recalling for two seconds,
after the obstruction is removed.
Then try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the
appropriate memory button. If the
memory position is still not being
recalled, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
•
The remote memory seat recall
feature.
For programming information, see
If the easy exit seat feature is on in
the Driver Information Center (DIC),
automatic seat movement will occur
when the key is removed from the
ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT”
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
Seats and Restraint System
In vehicles with seats that have
manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Reclining Seatbacks
In vehicles with seats that have
power reclining seatbacks,
the control used to recline them is
located on the outboard side of
the seat behind the power
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION
To recline the seatback, do the
following:
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle
andconfuse you, or make you
push a pedal when you do not
want to. Adjust the driver’s seat
only when the vehicle is not
moving.
page 1-4 for more information.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired
position, then release the lever to
lock the seatback in place.
•
To recline the seatback, tilt the
top of the control rearward.
•
To bring the seatback forward, tilt
the top of the control forward.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright
position, do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
{ CAUTION
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-9
Rear Seats
{ CAUTION
Rear Seat Operation
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
your vehicle is moving.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
A. Seat Adjustment Handle
B. Reclining Seatback Strap
C. Sliding Seat Lever
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
Seats and Restraint System
3. Place folding armrests in the
upright position.
Entering and Exiting the
Third Row
4. Ensure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.
{ CAUTION
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into
place.
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)
forward and move the seatback
forward. The seat cushion
will fold, and the entire seat will
slide forward.
Returning the Seat to the
Seating Position
To access the third row:
To return the second row seat to its
normal seating position:
1. Remove objects on the floor in
front of or on the second row
seat, or in the seat tracks on
the floor.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Remove objects on the floor
behind the second row seat
or in the seat tracks on the floor.
2. Move the front center console
armrest completely forward.
page 2-50.
2. Pull the seatback rearward until it
is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
Adjusting the Seats
1-11
3. Slide the seat rearward by
pushing on the seatback until
it is locked into place.
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the second row seats:
To adjust the second row seats, pull
outward on the seat adjustment
handle (A). Slide the seat forward or
rearward to the desired position.
Release the handle and push
and pull on the seat to make sure it
is locked.
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked
in place.
2. Place the armrest in the upright
position, and unfasten the
safety belt.
5. Push and pull on the seatback
and seat cushion to make sure
they are locked in place.
3. Pull forward on the reclining
seatback strap (B) and push
down on the seatback.
6. Check that the safety belt is not
under the seat cushion.
If the headrest touches the front
seat, slide the second row
seat rearward.
Reclining the Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:
To return the seatback to the
seating position, lift the upper corner
of the seatback and push it
rearward until it locks into place.
Push and pull on the seatback
to make sure it is locked.
1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull
the reclining seatback strap (B).
2. Move the seatback to the desired
position, then release the strap
to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
Seats and Restraint System
To fold the seatback:
Third Row Seats
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
{ CAUTION
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or pushed forward in the
entry position, could cause injury
in a sudden stop or crash. Be
sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place.
3. Pull up on the release lever
located on the back of the
seat. The headrest moves
forward automatically.
The third row seats can be folded
forward or removed.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt
mini-latch, using a key in the
slot on the mini-buckle, let
4. Push the seatback forward
to lay flat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
the belt retract into the headliner.
Stow the mini-latch in the
holder located in the headliner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-13
To return the seatback to the
seating position:
Removing the Third Row
Seats
{ CAUTION
1. Raise the seatback into place by
using the pullstrap from the rear
of the vehicle, or by pushing
it into place from inside the
vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo management
system, if it is in the vehicle. See
on page 2-53.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached, or
twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
2. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
2. The headrest must be locked
into place before sitting in
the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
{ CAUTION
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
4. Reconnect the center safety belt
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do
not let it twist.
3. Fold the seatback down. See
“Folding the Seatback” earlier
in this section.
5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure
the mini-latch is secure.
4. Remove the rear bolts located on
the floor on each side of the seat.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
Seats and Restraint System
5. Remove the seat by tilting it
slightly upward, and then pulling it
out of the rear of the vehicle in
one motion.
2. Place the seat on the vehicle
floor so that the front seat
Safety Belts
hooks are on the vehicle bars.
Safety Belts: They Are
for Everyone
This section of the manual describes
how to use safety belts properly.
It also describes some things not to
do with safety belts.
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to
55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
seat to make sure it is locked
in place.
6. Replace the bolts in the floor
holes for storage.
Installing the Third Row Seats
1. Before installing the seat the
seatback must be folded
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
position. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is
locked into place.
forward. See “Folding the
Seatback” earlier in this section.
{ CAUTION
5. Push the headrest up into
position. Push and pull on
the headrest to make sure it is
locked into place.
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
The seats must be placed in
the proper locations to attach
correctly. The wider seat must be
installed on the driver side and
the narrower seat on the
passenger side. Remove the
bolts from the holes in the floor
before installing the seats.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You and
your passenger(s) can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash,
you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your
passenger(s) are restrained
properly too.
6. Reconnect the center safety belt
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do
not let it twist.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-15
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires
wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
{ CAUTION
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
You never know if you will be
in a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are
in between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
page 3-32 for additional information.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
Seats and Restraint System
Put someone on it.
The person keeps going until
or the instrument panel...
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-17
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out,
is much greater if you are
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does not
protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
belted. And you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as
the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Most accidents occur within
25 miles (40 km) of home. And
the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants
Safety belts are for everyone.
still have to buckle up to get the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
Seats and Restraint System
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information
you should know.
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety
belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children
and infants. If a child will be riding in
rules for everyone’s protection.
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The lap belt should
be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It
will not give as much protection
this way.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
Seats and Restraint System
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt
into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
A: The belt is over an armrest.
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward, which
would increase the chance of
head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
Seats and Restraint System
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
page 1-12 for instruction on
reconnecting the safety belt to the
mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let
it get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
4. Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you
very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to
unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
Seats and Restraint System
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver
and right front passenger seating
positions.
See “Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment” later in this section
for instructions on use and
important safety information.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on the shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face
and neck, but not falling off of the
shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the
safety belt, near the guide loop on
the side wall.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
It may be necessary to pull the
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-25
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the
vehicle’s safety belt system. See
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although the safety
belt pretensioners cannot be seen,
they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They can help tighten the
safety belts during the early
stages of a moderate to severe
frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met.
And, for vehicles with side impact
airbags, safety belt pretensioners
can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash or a rollover event.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
To move it down, push down on the
button (A) and move the height
adjuster to the desired position. You
can move the height adjuster up by
pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired
position, try to move it down without
pushing the button to make sure it
has locked into position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
Seats and Restraint System
There is a guide for each outboard
passenger position in the second row
seat and all passenger positions in
the third row. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
comfort guide, you will first need
to move the headrest forward
by pulling on the handle behind
the seatback. The comfort
guide will now be accessible.
2. Place the guide over the belt and
insert the two edges of the belt
into the slots of the guide.
Outboard Positions
Third Row Center Position
Pull the comfort guide out of its
storage location and then return
the headrest to its upright
position.
1. For the outboard positions,
remove the guide from its storage
clip on the interior body.
For the third row center position,
locate the comfort guide which
is located in a storage pocket, at
the top of the seat, under the
headrest on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. To access the
The elastic cord on the comfort
guide is adjustable. You can
make it longer or shorter
by squeezing both ends of the
plastic adjuster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-27
{ CAUTION
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The elastic
cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
4. Buckle, position, and release the
safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide.
Slide the guide into its storage
location or on its storage clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-28
Seats and Restraint System
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a
safety belt is worn properly,
it is more likely that the fetus will not
be hurt in a crash. For pregnant
women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will
order you an extender. When you
go in to order it, take the heaviest
coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, attach it to
the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle’s safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion
should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-29
The manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the booster seat, state
the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat
with a lap-shoulder belt until
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
•
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of
the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
the child passes the below fit test:
•
Sit all the way back on the
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety
belts properly.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
seat. Do the knees bend at the
seat edge? If yes, continue.
If no, return to the booster seat.
•
Buckle the lap-shoulder
belt. Does the shoulder belt rest
on the shoulder? If yes,
continue. If no, try using the rear
safety belt comfort guide. See
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to
the child’s pelvic bones in a
crash. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal
internal injuries in a crash.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 1-23 for more
information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
•
Does the lap belt fit low and snug
on the hips, touching the thighs?
If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt
on page 1-23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-30
Seats and Restraint System
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants and
all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in
every state in the United States and
in every Canadian province says
children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-31
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)
infant will suddenly become a
240 lb (110 kg) force on a
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children
ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by
person’s arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate
restraint.
appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people, or
can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-32
Seats and Restraint System
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
{ CAUTION
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint,
be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is
alsobetter to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
vehicle safety standards. The
restraint manufacturer’s
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a
particular child restraint. In
addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children
with special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are
purchased by the vehicle’s
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-33
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an
infant in a rear-facing child
A young child’s hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-34
Seats and Restraint System
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ CAUTION
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child
restraint designed to improve the fit
of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-35
the LATCH system. See Lower
information. A child can be
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure
to properly secure any child
restraint in the vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that
come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
{ CAUTION
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly
following the instructions that
came with that child restraint.
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-36
Seats and Restraint System
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible
with this vehicle.
CAUTION (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
{ CAUTION
Keep in mind that an unsecured child
restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as
it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
on page 1-55 for additional
information.
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-37
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to attach
a child restraint with these
seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors
in the vehicle and attachments
Top Tether Anchor
attachments in your vehicle.
on the child restraint that are made
for use with the LATCH system.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this
manual. When installing a
Lower Anchors
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving
or in a crash.
child restraint with a top tether, you
must also use either the lower
anchors or the safety belts to
properly secure the child restraint. A
child restraint must never be
attached using only the top tether
and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each LATCH
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-38
Seats and Restraint System
Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for your
child restraint.
Second Row — 60/40 Bench
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a
top tether, one can be obtained,
in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions
with two lower anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions
with two lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-39
The top tether anchors are located at
the bottom rear of the seatback for
each seating position in the second
row. Open the cover to access the
anchors. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover or
near the anchor.
Third Row
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
Third Row Seat
The third row has one top tether
anchor located at the bottom rear of
the center seatback. This anchor
should be used for the center seating
position only. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether
anchor.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each second row
anchor position has a label, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Second Row — Bucket Shown,
Bench Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-40
Seats and Restraint System
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System
CAUTION (Continued)
anchor if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be
attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that
the top tether must be attached.
cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could
be injured. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they are restrained in
the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-35 for additional
information.
{ CAUTION
anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the
instructions in this manual.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
{ CAUTION
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-41
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to avoid
rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1.2. Recline the seatback to the
Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following
steps:
full reclined position.
Make sure the second row
bench seatbacks are aligned
at the same angle before
placing the child restraint on
the seat. Make sure the third
row bench seatbacks are
both upright before placing
the child restraint on
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the anchor is covered,
flip open the cover to
expose the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
the seat.
instructions and the
following instructions:
1.3. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in
this manual.
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if the vehicle has one.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the seatback.
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-42
Seats and Restraint System
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
headrest or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-43
In Canada, the law requires that
Securing a Child
Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be using
the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
on page 1-37 for how and where to
install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
in the vehicle using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower
anchor locations.
3. Push the latch plate into the
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and
run the lap and shoulder portions
of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint.
The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-44
Seats and Restraint System
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
on page 1-37 for more
information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the
belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child
restraint, it may be helpful to use
your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-45
Securing a Child
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
A child in a rear-facing child
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
off. If you secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat
is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
page 1-35.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See
Status Indicator on page 3-34
for more information, including
important safety information.
on page 1-55 for additional
information.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
on page 1-37 for how and where to
install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and
on page 1-37 for top tether anchor
locations.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-46
Seats and Restraint System
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
when the vehicle is started. See
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions
of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint.
The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag, the off indicator on
the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-47
If the airbags are off, the off indicator
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
in the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If
the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-55
for more information.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
•
•
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on
the child restraint, pull the
•
•
A roof-rail airbag for the driver,
passenger seated directly
behind the driver, and the third
row outboard passenger position.
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger, passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger, and the third row
outboard passenger position.
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-48
Seats and Restraint System
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ CAUTION
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
label near the deployment opening.
{ CAUTION
For frontal airbags, the word
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for
the driver and on the instrument
panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG
will appear on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-49
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for
young children and infants.
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
more information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-50
Seats and Restraint System
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, passengers
behind the driver and right front
passenger, and the third row
outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-51
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For example:
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
{ CAUTION
•
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that
person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest.
However, they are only designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe
a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
•
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
•
•
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling. It
depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-52
Seats and Restraint System
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in
a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by
the direction of the roll.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,
rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in
rear impacts. A seat-mounted
side impact airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck. Both roof-rail airbags
will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle
is about to roll over, or in a severe
frontal impact.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended
to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate during
a rollover or in a severe frontal
impact. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For
seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary
is determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In
with specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-53
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near
frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
designed to help contain the head
and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first, second, and third rows. The
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant’s motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Frontal airbags distribute the
force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the
occupant’s upper body.
page 1-51 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-54
Seats and Restraint System
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There
may be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields
are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
CAUTION (Continued)
breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If
you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
•
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors,
turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on
when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, and turn the hazard
warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the
{ CAUTION
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
need to replace other parts.
•
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash.
and Privacy on page 7-16
page 7-17.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-55
The passenger sensing system turns
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag under certain conditions. The
driver airbag, seat-mounted side
impact airbags and the roof-rail
airbags are not affected by the
passenger sensing system.
•
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not
work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Canada
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be
visible on the instrument panel when
the vehicle is started.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, are visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped,
to start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off,
will be visible. See Passenger
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
page 3-34.
United States
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-56
Seats and Restraint System
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag if:
CAUTION (Continued)
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is
in a forward position.
•
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
•
The system determines that an
infant is present in a child
restraint.
large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
•
•
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat
for a period of time.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag is off.
A child in a rear-facing child
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
off. If you secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-57
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly
in the right front passenger seat.
Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is active.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have
the vehicle serviced right away.
page 3-33 for more information,
including important safety
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
page 1-45.
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-58
Seats and Restraint System
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then
If this happens, use the following
steps to allow the system to detect
that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle
seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle
head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
page 1-2.
4. Have the person sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat.
6. Restart the vehicle.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the
on indicator is lit.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-59
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on an
unoccupied seat. If this is not desired
remove the object from the seat.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger
in position on the seat during vehicle
maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag
status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
•
The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger airbag
when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off
indicator will be lit, and the airbag
readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
{ CAUTION
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
•
Liquid pooled on the seat that has
not soaked in may make it more
likely that the passenger sensing
system will enable (turn on) the
passenger airbag while a child
restraint or child occupant is on
the seat. If the passenger airbag
is turned on, the on indicator will
be lit.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion, or
aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment
page 1-60 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-60
Seats and Restraint System
steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules,
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
CAUTION (Continued)
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module,
or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing the vehicle and the airbag
system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the
vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working
properly?
{ CAUTION
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle’s frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere
with the operation of the
(Continued)
passenger sensing system. This
could either prevent proper
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraint System
1-61
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system from
properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
page 1-55.
Q: Because I have a disability, I
Restraint System
Check
have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
Checking the Restraint
Systems
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step
Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See
on page 7-1.
Safety Belts
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step
Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See
on page 7-1.
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your
dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not
protect you in a crash. They can
rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new
one right away.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
page 5-56 for additional
important information.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-62
Seats and Restraint System
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
page 5-86.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected
or replaced.
Replacing Restraint
System Parts After a
Crash
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a crash,
you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Airbags
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
{ CAUTION
A crash can damage the restraint
systems in your vehicle. A
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt or
LATCH system (if equipped),
was not being used at the time of
the crash.
damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person
using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
on page 3-33 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering
is damaged, opened, or broken,
the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any opened
or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag
module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
dealer/retailer for service.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started,
or while you are driving. See Airbag
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do
you need new safety belts or LATCH
system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing
may be necessary. But the
safety belt assemblies that were
used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas
Keys
{ CAUTION
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and
all door locks.
Sunroof
The key has a bar-coded key tag
that the dealer/retailer or qualified
locksmith can use to make new
keys. Store this information in a safe
place, not in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-3
See your dealer/retailer if a
replacement key or additional key
is needed.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your
keys in the vehicle, you may have
to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range, try this:
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
•
•
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle. Stand closer
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
during rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles
or objects may be blocking the
signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
•
•
Check the transmitter’s battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Features and Controls
The interior lamps come on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up
to 195 feet (60 m) away from the
vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For vehicles with this feature,
page 2-6 for additional information.
If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See DIC
Q (Lock): Press to lock all
the doors.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of
the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn sounds
when Q is pressed again within
five seconds. See DIC Vehicle
on page 3-65 for additional
information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-16.
& (Power Liftgate): Press and
hold for about one second to open
and close the liftgate. The taillamps
flash and a chime sounds to indicate
when the liftgate is opening and
closing.
Pressing Q may arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):
Press and release to locate the
vehicle. The parking lamps flash
and the horn sounds three times.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
only the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds,
all remaining doors unlock.
With Remote Start and Liftgate
(Without Remote Start or
Liftgate Similar)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-5
Any lost or stolen transmitters will
no longer work once the new
transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to
eight transmitters programmed to it.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50
for instructions on how to program
transmitters to this vehicle.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the
panic alarm. The parking lamps
flash and the horn sounds
repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the
ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L
is pressed again. The ignition must
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic
alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters
to the Vehicle
Battery Replacement
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
notch on the side.
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased
and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with
a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle using
the DIC, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Features and Controls
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
For example, some laws may
require a person using the remote
start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that starts the engine
from outside of the vehicle.
/ (Remote Start): This button is
located on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle has remote start.
To start the vehicle:
If the vehicle has an automatic
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q, then
regulations for any requirements on
remote starting of vehicles.
climate control system, the climate
control system defaults to a heating
or cooling mode depending on the
outside temperatures. If the vehicle
does not have an automatic climate
control system, the system turns on
at the setting the vehicle was set to
when the vehicle was last turned off.
immediately press and hold /
until the parking lamps flash. If the
vehicle’s lights can not be seen,
Do not use the remote start
feature if the vehicle is low on fuel.
The vehicle could run out of fuel.
press and hold / for at least
If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may
be less while the vehicle is running.
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors
lock. When the vehicle starts, the
parking lamps turn on and remain
on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated
seats, the heated seats turn on
during colder outside temperatures
and shut off when the key is turned to
page 1-5 for more information.
Pressing / again, after the
vehicle has started, shuts the
vehicle off.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of
the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3
for additional information.
3. If it is the first remote start since
the vehicle has been driven,
The rear window defogger and
heated mirrors, if the vehicle
has them, turn on during colder
outside temperatures and turn off
when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
repeat these steps while the
engine is still running, to extend
the time by 10 minutes for the
engine to continue to run. Remote
start can be extended one time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-7
After entering the vehicle during a
remote start, insert and turn the key
to the ON/RUN position to drive
the vehicle.
10 minutes within the first 10 minute
remote start time frame, and
before the engine stops.
The engine turns off during a
remote start if the coolant
temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
For example, if Q and then / are
pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for 15 minutes.
If the vehicle is left running it
automatically shuts off after
10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done.
Vehicles that have the remote
vehicle start feature are shipped
from the factory with the remote
vehicle start system enabled.
The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC if the
vehicle has DIC buttons. See
“REMOTE START” under DIC
information. If the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, see your
dealer/retailer to enable or disable
the remote start system.
To manually shut off a remote start:
The additional 10 minutes are
considered a second remote start.
•
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press / until the
parking lamps turn off.
The vehicle must be started with the
key once two remote starts, or a
single remote start with one
•
•
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
time extension has been done.
The vehicle can be started using the
remote start feature again after
the key is removed from the ignition.
Turn the ignition switch on and
then off.
The vehicle can be started using the
remote start feature two separate
times between driving sequences.
The engine runs for 10 minutes after
each remote start. Or, the engine
run time can be extended another
The vehicle cannot be started
using the remote start feature if the
key is in the ignition, the hood is
open, or if there is an emission
control system malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Features and Controls
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are
located on the front doors.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION (Continued)
Door Locks
• Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
• Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock
the doors.
{ CAUTION
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from
the ignition and press to lock
the doors.
• Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all
passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door or
the liftgate is open, the doors
will lock five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear
three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use.
To lock or unlock a door, use the
key from the outside or the door lock
from the inside.
Pressing the power lock switch twice
or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and
(Continued)
immediately lock all the doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-9
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to
the vertical position.
Rear Door Security
Locks
The vehicle has rear door security
locks to prevent passengers
from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
This feature can be programmed
by using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “DELAY
DOOR LOCK” under DIC Vehicle
on page 3-65.
Lockout Protection
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
This feature protects you from
locking the key in the vehicle when
the key is in the ignition and a
front door is open.
Vehicles with an automatic
lock/unlock feature enable you to
program the vehicle’s power
door locks. This feature can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information.
If the driver side power door lock
switch is pressed when the driver’s
door is open and the key is in
the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver door will unlock.
If the passenger side power door
lock switch is pressed when the front
passenger door is open and the
key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the front
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks on the inside edge
of each door.
passenger door will unlock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Features and Controls
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the underside of the
liftgate handle. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) to open the liftgate.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup
or strap.
Liftgate
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
• Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through
the seal between the body and
the trunk/hatch or liftgate.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
If the battery is properly connected
and has adequate voltage, and
the liftgate still will not function,
the vehicle should be taken
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
If the vehicle has a power liftgate,
to a dealers/retailer for service.
• Fully open the air outlets on or
To unlock the liftgate, use the power
door lock switch or press the door
unlock button on the RKE transmitter
twice. See Remote Keyless Entry
page 2-4.
under the instrument panel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-11
Power Liftgate
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
Power Liftgate Operation
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
• Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
{ CAUTION
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
The vehicle may have a power
liftgate. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) to use this feature.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or
under the instrument panel.
The power liftgate can be power
opened and closed in the
following ways:
The taillamps will flash and a chime
will sound when the power liftgate
is used.
•
Press and hold the power liftgate
button on the RKE transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving.
System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Features and Controls
If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)
while the power function is in
progress, the liftgate power function
will continue to completion. If the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and
the vehicle accelerates before the
power liftgate latches closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
position. Cargo could fall out of the
vehicle. The power liftgate must be
closed and latched before driving.
If the liftgate is power opened and
the support struts have lost pressure,
the lights will flash and a chime will
sound. The liftgate will stay open
temporarily, then slowly close.
See your dealer/retailer for service
before using the liftgate if this occurs.
Power Liftgate Button on
Center Console
Power Liftgate Button near
Liftgate Latch
•
•
Press the liftgate button on the
center console.
The liftgate can also be closed
by pressing the power liftgate button
next to the liftgate latch. Press the
button a second time during
liftgate operation to reverse the
operation.
Press the touchpad switch on the
outside liftgate handle.
Obstacle Detection Features
Pressing the buttons or touchpad
switch a second time while the
liftgate is moving reverses the
direction.
A warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open
position if the liftgate encounters an
obstacle during a power open or
close cycle. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures or under low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.
operation can be used again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-13
If the liftgate comes across more
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function deactivates, and
you must manually open or close
the liftgate. A message displays,
LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that
the liftgate is open. See Driver
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
the outside of the liftgate and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will
power close. Always close the
liftgate before driving.
page 3-44 for more information.
After removing the obstructions,
manually open the liftgate to the full
open position or close the liftgate to
the fully closed and latched position.
The liftgate resumes normal power
operation.
If the RKE button or the power close
button on the liftgate is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the
lights will flash three times, but the
liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you
drive with the liftgate open.
However, if you must drive with the
liftgate open, the liftgate should
be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the
center console.
Pinch sensors are located on the
side edges of the liftgate. If an object
is caught between the liftgate and the
vehicle and presses against this
sensor, the liftgate will reverse
direction and open fully. The liftgate
will remain open until it is activated
again or closed manually. Do not
force the liftgate open or closed
during a power cycle.
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, press the switch on
the center console to OFF.
With the power liftgate disabled
and all of the doors unlocked,
the liftgate can be manually opened
and closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Features and Controls
Power Windows
Windows
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and
they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave
keys in a vehicle with children.
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-15
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull up on the front edge of
the switch to raise the window.
Programming the Power
Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged, disconnected,
or replaced, windows with the
express-up feature need to be
reprogrammed for this feature to
work. To program the window:
Express-Down Windows
The express-down feature allows
the windows to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the
window switch fully and release it to
activate the express-down feature.
The express mode can be canceled
by pressing or pulling the switch.
1. Close all doors with the ignition
in the ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN position, or when
Retained Accessory
Uplevel shown, base similar
Express-Up Window
Power (RAP) is active.
The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.
The express-up feature allows the
windows to be raised all the
way without holding the switch up.
Pull the switch up fully and release it
to activate the express-up feature.
The express-up mode can be
canceled by pressing or pulling
the switch.
2. Press and continue to hold the
window switch until the window
is fully open.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and
rear windows. The power windows
work with the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory
3. Pull up and hold the window
switch to close the window.
Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has
the express-up feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Features and Controls
Anti-Pinch Feature
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent
Systems
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features, however, they do not
make it impossible to steal.
The anti-pinch feature is on windows
with the express-up feature. If an
object is in the way of the window as
it is express-closing, or in certain
weather conditions like severe
icing, the window will stop and
open to a factory preset position.
The window functions normally once
the obstruction is removed.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along
the rod from side-to-side to cover
the driver or passenger side of
the front window. Swing the
sun visor to the side to cover the
side window. It can be moved along
the rod from side-to-side in this
position also.
Content Theft-Deterrent
This vehicle may have a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
o (Window Lockout): The
window lockout switch is located
with the power window switches
on the driver door armrest.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating
the windows, except from the
driver position. Press the switch to
turn the lockout feature on or off.
An indicator light will come on
to show the lockout feature is on.
To activate the theft-deterrent
system, do one of the following:
The vehicle has lighted visor vanity
mirrors on both the driver and
passenger sun visors. Pull the
sun visor down and lift the mirror
cover to turn the lamps on.
•
Press Q on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
power door lock switch when any
door is open.
The security light flashes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-17
When the door is closed, the
security light stops flashing and
stays on solid for approximately
30 seconds. The content theft
deterrent alarm is not armed until
the security light goes off.
The horn chirps and the lights flash.
If the key is not placed in the
ignition and turned to START or the
door is not unlocked by pressing Q
during the ten second pre-alarm, the
alarm goes off. The headlamps flash
and the horn sounds for about
two minutes, then turns off to save
the battery power.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the
driver side window and open the
driver door.
If the delayed locking feature is
active, the alarm is not activated
until all doors are closed and the
security light goes off.
2. Press Q.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
door and wait for the security
light to go out.
The vehicle can be started with the
correct ignition key if the alarm
has been set off.
•
Press Q when the driver door is
closed. The security light comes
on solid for approximately
30 seconds and then goes off.
The content theft deterrent alarm
is not armed until the security light
goes off.
4. Then reach in through the
window, unlock the door with
the manual door lock and open
the door. This should set off
the alarm.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
•
Lock the vehicle with the door
key after the doors are closed.
If the alarm does not sound when it
should, but the vehicle’s headlamps
flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see Fuses
•
Unlock the door with the RKE
transmitter. Unlocking a door
any other way sets off the alarm
if the system has been armed.
The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked
with the vehicle’s key or the manual
door lock.
Press K or place the key in
the ignition and turn it to START to
turn off the alarm.
If a locked door is opened
without using the RKE transmitter,
a ten second pre-alarm occurs.
If the alarm does not sound or the
vehicle’s headlamps do not flash,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Features and Controls
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
The PASS-Key III+ system operates
on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause
interference.
Commission (FCC) Rules and with
Industry Canada.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two
conditions:
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed
when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
authorization to use this equipment.
The security light comes on if there is
a problem with arming or disarming
the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system
senses an incorrect key, the vehicle
does not start. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the
vehicle will be discouraged because
of the high number of electrical
key codes.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio
frequency transponder in the key
that matches a decoder in the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-19
If the engine does not start and the
security light on the instrument panel
comes on when trying to start the
vehicle, there may be a problem with
your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith
who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed
to the system.
4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to the ON/RUN
position within five seconds of
the original key being turned
to the LOCK/OFF position.
The security light turns off once
the key has been programmed.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key and check
the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
still does not start with the other
key, the vehicle needs service. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer
who can service the PASS-Key® III+
to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+
decoder to learn the transponder
value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed
to the vehicle. The following
See your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key
blank that is cut exactly as the
ignition key that operates the
system.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4
if additional keys are to be
programmed.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or
damaged, see your dealer/retailer or
a locksmith to have a new key made.
To program the new key:
The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
SYSTEM message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system. See DIC
1. Verify that the new key has
a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed
key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine does not
start, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
page 3-56 for additional information.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF,
and remove the key.
procedure is for programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Features and Controls
•
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 200 miles (322 km)
or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in
Ignition Positions
Starting and
Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does
not need an elaborate break-in.
But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these
guidelines:
guideline every time you get
new brake linings.
•
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Towing a
trailer towing capabilities
of your vehicle and more
information.
•
If you have all-wheel drive,
keep your speed at 55 mph
(88 km/h) or less for the
first 500 miles (805 km).
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
In order to shift out of P (Park),
the ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the
•
Do not drive at any one
Following break-in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle
brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key,
make sure it is all the way in, and
turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand,
see your dealer/retailer.
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-21
( (LOCK/OFF): This position
locks the ignition and transmission.
The key can be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
R (ON/RUN): This position can be
used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument panel warning and
indicator lights. The switch stays in
this position when the engine is
running. The transmission is
also unlocked in this position.
If you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position with the engine off,
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after
the ignition key is turned off:
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
•
•
•
Audio System
Power Windows
Sunroof (if equipped)
The steering can bind with the
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning
the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle
needs service.
Power to the windows and sunroof
will work up to 10 minutes or
until a door is opened.
the battery could be drained. You
may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain
for an extended period of time.
The radio continues to work for
10 minutes or until the driver’s door
is opened.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is
the position in which you can
/ (START): This is the position
that starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch will return to
ON/RUN for driving.
For an additional 10 minutes of
operation, close all the doors and
turn the key to ON/RUN and
then back to LOCK/OFF.
operate the electrical accessories or
items plugged into the accessory
power outlets. This position unlocks
the ignition and steering wheel.
Use this position if the vehicle must
be pushed or towed.
All these features will work when
the key is in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Features and Controls
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Cranking System. This feature
assists in starting the engine
and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to
the START position, and
then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine
will continue cranking for a
few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch
to the ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start
after 5-10 seconds, especially
in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded
with too much gasoline.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the
Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold
the key in START for up to a
maximum of 15 seconds.
accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the
engine starts, let go of the key.
The idle speed will slow down
as the engine warms. Do not
race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
When the engine starts, let go
of the key and accelerator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-23
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine
warm-up in cold weather conditions
at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should
be plugged in at least four hours
before starting. Some models
may have an internal thermostat
in the cord which will prevent
{ CAUTION
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics
in the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine
parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
located on the driver side of the
engine compartment. It is
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be
parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
routed around the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Features and Controls
control system. You must fully apply
the regular brake first and then
press the shift lever button before
shifting from P (Park) when the
ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you
cannot shift out of P (Park),
ease pressure on the shift lever,
then push the shift lever all the way
into P (Park) as you maintain
Automatic Transmission
Operation
The automatic transmission has a
shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
{ CAUTION
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have
to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
pulling a trailer, see Towing a
brake application. Then press the
shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear. See
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully
in P (Park) before starting the
engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-25
To rock the vehicle back and forth
to get out of snow, ice or sand
without damaging the transmission,
page 4-17.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and you
continue to drive the vehicle that
way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can
drive in L (Low) when you are
driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h)
and D (Drive) for higher speeds
until then.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with
the wheels. To restart the engine
when the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle
is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
L (Low): This position gives you
access to gear ranges. This provides
more engine braking but lower fuel
economy than D (Drive). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep
snow or mud.
•
Going less than 35 mph
(56 km/h), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
{ CAUTION
•
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into
a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Features and Controls
page 3-50 for more information.
The number displayed in the DIC
is the highest gear that the
transmission will be allowed to
operate in. This means that all gears
below that number are available.
For example, when 4 (Fourth) is
shown next to the L, 1 (First)
Automatic Engine Grade braking is
not available when the ERS is active.
It is available in D (Drive) for both
normal and Tow/Haul mode.
While using the ERS, cruise control
and the tow/haul mode can be used.
for more information.
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose
the top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle’s speed while
driving down hill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument panel cluster. When using
the ERS Mode a number will display
next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
Tow/Haul Mode
through 4 (Fourth) gears are
_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may
have a Tow/Haul mode.
automatically shifted by the vehicle.
The transmission will not shift into
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is
used or you shift back into D (Drive).
To use this feature:
The button is located on the
instrument panel under the climate
controls.
1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Press the plus/minus button
located on the shift lever, to
increase or decrease the gear
range available.
While in L (Low), the transmission
will prevent shifting to a lower
gear range if the engine speed is
too high. You have a brief period of
time to slow the vehicle. If vehicle
speed is not reduced within the time
allowed, the lower gear range shift
will not be completed. You must
further slow the vehicle, then press
the − (Minus) button to the desired
lower gear range.
Push the button to activate the
system. Push it again to deactivate
the system. You can use this
feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load.
When you shift from D (Drive) to
L (Low), the transmission will shift to
a pre-determined lower gear range.
The highest gear available for this
pre-determined range is displayed
next to the L in the DIC. See Driver
When Tow/Haul is activated the
Tow/Haul symbol will come on the
instrument panel cluster. See
“Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-27
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature wear
or damage to brake system parts.
Make sure that the parking brake
is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Automatic Engine Grade
Braking
Parking Brake
Automatic Engine Grade Braking
assists when driving on a downhill
grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift
schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
The system will automatically
command downshifts to reduce
vehicle speed, until the brake pedal
is no longer being pressed.
To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down,
then push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel
the pedal release. Slowly pull
your foot up off the park brake
pedal. If the parking brake is
not released when you begin to
drive, the brake system warning light
will be on and a chime will sound
warning you that the parking
brake is still on.
While in the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
is deactivated, allowing the driver
to select a range and limiting
the highest gear available. Grade
braking is available for normal
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
To set the parking brake, hold the
regular brake pedal down, then push
the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the brake system
warning light will come on. See
on page 3-36.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Towing a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Features and Controls
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
If you have to leave the vehicle
with the engine running, be sure
the vehicle is in P (Park) and
the parking brake is firmly set
before you leave it. After you have
moved the shift lever into P (Park),
hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from P (Park)
without first pushing the button.
Shifting Into Park
4. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
page 4-26.
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the
Engine Running
If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked in P (Park).
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running,
it could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight of
the vehicle puts too much force
on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting
the transmission into P (Park) is
not done properly and then it
is difficult to shift out of P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down
and set the parking brake.
for more information.
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the
shift lever all the way toward the
front of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-29
To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift
into P (Park). To find out how,
see “Shifting Into Park” listed
previously.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of
an uncharged or low voltage
(less than 9 volt) battery.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your
dealer/retailer.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
page 5-30 for more information.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so
you can shift out of P (Park).
{ CAUTION
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or
other things that can burn.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of Park
The vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
•
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in P (Park)
with the shift lever button fully
released, and
If you still are unable to shift out
of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
•
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless
the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the
regular brake pedal is applied.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Features and Controls
Engine Exhaust
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
• The vehicle’s exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
{ CAUTION
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
• The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
For more information, see Engine
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-31
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Mirrors
{ CAUTION
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the automatic
Adjust the inside rearview mirror
to see clearly behind your vehicle.
Hold the mirror in the center to move
it up or down and side to side.
Use the day/night adjustment to help
prevent glare from the headlamps
behind you. Move the lever to the
right for nighttime use and to
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have
to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park).
Vehicles with OnStar® have
three additional control buttons for
the OnStar® system. See your
dealer/retailer for more information
about OnStar® and how to subscribe
page 2-42 for more information about
the left for daytime use.
the services OnStar® provides.
Vehicles with OnStar® have
three additional control buttons
located at the bottom of the mirror.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information about OnStar and
information on the services OnStar
provides.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
The vehicle may also have a Rear
Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-37
for more information.
Follow the proper steps to be
sure the vehicle will not move.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O button
will not be available.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
page 4-26.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Features and Controls
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and
the area behind it can be seen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Operation
Outside Power Mirrors
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of
the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to
prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return it to the original position.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors
and add-on convex mirror
attachments could decrease mirror
performance.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are located on the driver
door armrest.
Turn Signal Indicator
To adjust each mirror:
The vehicle may have a turn signal
indicator lamp that is built into
the mirror housing. The turn signal
lamp flashes with the use of the
vehicle’s turn signal and hazard
flashers.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-33
Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Feature
Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
The driver outside mirror adjusts for
the glare of the headlamps behind
you. See Automatic Dimming
information on how to turn this
feature on.
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
•
•
•
The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
Turn Signal Indicator
The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
The vehicle may have a turn signal
indicator lamp that is built into the
mirror housing. The turn signal lamp
flashes with the use of the vehicle’s
turn signal and hazard flashers.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time
using the mirror controls to reset
them to their normal position.
A popping noise may be heard
during the resetting of the power
foldaway mirrors. This sound
is normal after a manual folding
operation.
Vehicles with outside power
foldaway mirrors have the controls
located on the driver door armrest.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Features and Controls
Park Tilt Mirrors
If the vehicle has the memory
package, the outside mirrors have a
park tilt feature. This feature tilts
the outside mirrors to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). This allows the driver
to view the curb for parallel parking.
Outside Convex Mirror
Object Detection
Systems
{ CAUTION
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it operates at speeds less than
5 mph (8 km/h), and assists the
driver with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper are
used to detect the distance to an
object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind
the vehicle, and at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground.
A convex mirror can make things
(like other vehicles) look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger and/or driver
mirror returns to its original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is
turned off or to OFF/LOCK.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror’s surface
is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
This feature can be turned on or off
through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
information.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-35
How the System Works
{ CAUTION
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system
is working.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicle
is above this speed, the red light on
the rear display flashes.
• objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
To be detected, objects must be at
least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the
ground and below liftgate level.
Objects must also be within 8 feet
(2.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
The display is located in the
headliner and can be seen by
looking over your right shoulder.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing; vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle’s mirrors.
URPA uses three color-coded lights
to provide distance and system
information.
A single beep sounds the first time
an object is detected. Beeping
may occur beginning at 23 inches
(0.6 m). Beeping occurs for a
short time when the vehicle is closer
than 23 inches (0.6 m) and again
at 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
Features and Controls
The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle
gets closer to a detected object:
•
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or a bicycle or an
object was hanging out of the
liftgate during the last drive cycle,
the red light may illuminate in
the rear display. Once the
attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
Description
amber light
English
8 ft
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
0.3 m
amber/amber lights
40 in
23 in
1 ft
amber/amber/red lights
amber/amber/red lights flashing
•
•
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
The system can be disabled
through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “Park Assist”
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50
for more information.
ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC
and a red light will be shown on the
rear URPA display when the shift
lever is moved into R (Reverse).
This may occur under the following
conditions:
The vehicle’s bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair
the system.
•
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such
as vibrations from a jackhammer
or the compression of air
•
•
The driver disables the system.
The ultrasonic sensors are
not clean. Keep the vehicle’s rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after
driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-37
Vehicles Without Navigation
System
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
CAUTION (Continued)
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view
of the area behind the vehicle. When
the key is in the ON/RUN position
and the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
inside rear view mirror. Once the
driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
the video image automatically
disappears from the inside rearview
mirror.
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the rear vision camera
screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing
maneuvers or where there could
be cross-traffic. Your judged
distances using the screen will
differ from actual distances.
{ CAUTION
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
So if you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could hit a
vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,
or pet, resulting in vehicle
damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the RVC
system, always check carefully
before backing up by checking
behind and around the vehicle.
• Detect objects that are
outside the camera’s field of
view, below the bumper, or
underneath the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System Off or On
To turn off the rear vision camera
system, press and hold z, located
on the inside rearview mirror,
until the left indicator light turns off.
The rear vision camera display
is now disabled.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-38
Features and Controls
To turn the rear vision camera
system on again, press and hold z
until the left indicator light illuminates.
The rear vision camera system
display is now enabled and the
display will appear in the mirror
normally.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the MENU button to enter
the configure menu options, then
press the MENU hard key to
select Display or touch the
Vehicles With Navigation
System
The rear vision camera system
is designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view
of the area behind the vehicle.
When the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
navigation screen. Once the
driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
the navigation screen will go back
to the last screen that had been
displayed, after a delay.
Display screen button.
4. Select the Video screen button.
When the Video screen button is
highlighted the RVC system is on.
3. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen displays.
The delay that is received after
shifting out of R (Reverse) is
approximately 10 seconds.
The delay can be cancelled by
performing one of the following:
•
Pressing a hard key on the
navigation system.
•
•
Shifting in to P (Park).
Reach a vehicle speed of
5 mph (8 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-39
There is a message on the rear
vision camera screen that states
“Check Surroundings for Safety”.
Symbols
To turn the symbols on or off:
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the rear vision camera.
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols.
If URPA has been disabled and
the symbols have been turned on,
the Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable error message may
display. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled.
Adjusting the Brightness and
Contrast of the Screen
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to
enter the configure menu
options, then press the MENU
hard key repeatedly until Display
is selected or touch the Display
screen button.
To adjust the brightness and
contrast of the screen, press the
MENU button while the rear vision
camera image is on the display.
Any adjustments made will
only affect the rear vision camera
screen.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen will display.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
The symbols appear when an object
has been detected by the URPA
system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation
screen.
5. Touch the Symbols screen
button. The screen button will be
highlighted when on.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or decrease the contrast
of the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-40
Features and Controls
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
The following illustration shows
the field of view that the camera
provides.
Rear Vision Camera Location
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from
other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or
if a problem persists, see your
dealer/retailer.
The camera is located above the
license plate.
The area displayed by the camera
is limited and does not display
objects that are close to either
corner or under the bumper. The
area displayed can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-41
The rear vision camera system
display in the rearview mirror may
turn off or not appear as expected
due to one of the following
conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will flash.
During any of these fault conditions,
the display will be blank and the
indicator will continue to flash
as long as the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
The rear vision camera system
might not work properly or display a
clear image if:
•
The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera System
On or Off” earlier in this section.
•
A slow flash may indicate a
loss of video signal, or no
video signal present during the
reverse cycle.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will
turn off the video display along with
the left indicator light.
•
•
It is dark.
The sun or the beam of headlights
is shining directly into the
camera lens.
•
A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
maximum allowable time during a
reverse cycle, or the display has
reached an Over Temperature
limit.
•
•
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
The fast flash conditions are used
to protect the video device from
high temperature conditions.
Once conditions return to normal
the device will reset and the green
indicator will stop flashing.
The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera can
change or the camera can be
affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer/retailer.
•
There are extreme temperature
changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-42
Features and Controls
OnStar® System
vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation service, with one trial
route, is available on most vehicles.
Press the OnStar button to have
an OnStar advisor contact Roadside
Service.
For more information visit
onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca
(Canada), or press the OnStar
button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available
on all vehicles. To check if this
vehicle is able to provide the
services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar services
and system limitations, see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide in the glove
box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
OnStar service is provided subject
to the OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
OnStar uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, information, and
convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to
make an automatic call to OnStar
Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent
to your location. If the keys are
locked in the vehicle, call OnStar
at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a
signal sent to unlock the doors.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling,
Some services such as Remote
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance may not be
available until the owner of the
vehicle registers with OnStar.
After the first prepaid year, contact
OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan.
If a payment plan is not selected,
the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and
emergency services, may be
1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most
deactivated and no longer available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-43
plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar Owner’s Guide in
OnStar Services Available with
the Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
•
Automatic Notification of
Airbag Deployment
•
•
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
the vehicle’s glove box, visit
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
(If equipped) or Driving
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar advisor by pressing
the OnStar button or calling
•
Advanced Automatic Crash
Notification (AACN) (If equipped)
Directions - Advisor delivered
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
•
•
RideAssist
Information and Convenience
Services
OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation
Stolen Vehicle Location
Assistance
Vehicles with the OnStar
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Turn-by-Turn Navigation system
can provide voice-guided driving
directions. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor locate
a business or address and download
driving directions to the vehicle.
Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play
•
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle
Alert
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
eligible OnStar subscribers to
make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling
is fully integrated into the vehicle,
and can be used with OnStar
Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Most
vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free
Calling can also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in
the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service
•
•
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
GM Goodwrench On Demand
Diagnostics
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 trial minutes
through the audio system speakers.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide
for more information.
OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-44
Features and Controls
a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity
and reception when the service is
needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service.
Not all services are available
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of
OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses
minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. Press the phone button
and give a few simple voice
commands to browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and
transmit vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to
an OnStar Call Center when the
OnStar button is pressed, the
emergency button is pressed, or if
the airbags or AACN system deploy.
This information usually includes the
vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that
the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was
hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature
of OnStar Hands-Free Calling is
used, the vehicle also sends OnStar
the vehicle’s GPS location so they
can provide services where it is
located.
everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
Location information about
the vehicle is only available if the
GPS satellite signals are
unobstructed and available.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
The vehicle must have a working
electrical system, including adequate
battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are
other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar from
providing OnStar service at any
particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,
tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to
interact with OnStar Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel
information.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless the vehicle is in
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-45
Your Responsibility
This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Universal Home
Remote System
The Universal Home Remote
System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such
as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar advisor cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing),
your OnStar subscription has
expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
authorization to use this equipment.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-46
Features and Controls
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head
or gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
Universal Home Remote
System Operation
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program
the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light
above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions
below.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming.
It is also recommended that upon
the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased
for security purposes. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home
automation devices.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions,
so read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device
will time out and the procedure will
have to be repeated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-47
To program up to three devices:
2. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the
4. The indicator light on the
Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home
Remote successfully receives
the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view. The hand-held transmitter
was supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
5. Press and hold the newly-trained
Universal Home Remote button
and observe the indicator light.
3. At the same time, press and hold
both the Universal Home Remote
button to be used to control
the garage door and the
If the indicator light stays on
continuously, the programming is
complete and the garage door
should move when the Universal
Home Remote button is pressed
and released. There is no
hand-held transmitter button.
Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or
the hand-held transmitter button
until Step 4 has been completed.
1. From inside the vehicle, press
and hold down the two outside
buttons at the same time,
releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. This step will erase
the factory settings or all
previously programmed buttons.
need to continue programming
Steps 6 through 8.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
If the Universal Home Remote
indicator light blinks rapidly
for two seconds and then
turns to a constant light,
continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
Do not hold down the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds
and do not repeat this step to
program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-48
Features and Controls
It may be helpful to have another
person assist with the remaining
steps.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle.
Firmly press and hold the
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Universal Home Remote button,
chosen in Step 3 to control
the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the
garage door does not move,
press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds,
and then release it. Again, if
the door does not move, press
and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, and then
release.
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some
U.S. gate operators are
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
been completed, locate inside
the garage the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and
color of the button may vary
by manufacturer.
The Universal Home Remote
should now activate the
garage door.
manufactured to time out in the
same manner.
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a gate
operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming
Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where
7. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button.
After you press this button,
you will have 30 seconds
to complete Step 8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-49
you live, replace Step 3 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” with the following:
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Home Remote
Button
The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold
or the lease ends.
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
transmitter button until the frequency
signal has been successfully
accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home
Remote indicator light will flash
slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Home Remote buttons,
repeat the programming instructions
earlier in this section, beginning
with Step 2.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Home Remote device:
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Home Remote button
for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-50
Features and Controls
Center Console Storage
Second Row Center
Console
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift the glove box handle up to
open it. Use the key to lock
and unlock the glove box.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders, with
removable liners, located in front of
the center console. There may be
cupholders located in the second row
seat armrest. To access, pull the
armrest down. There are additional
cupholders located on each side of
the third row seat and in each door.
There may be cupholders located at
the rear of the center console.
Pull up on the lever, located on the
front of the center console armrest,
to slide it forward and backward.
To open the armrest storage area,
press the button located on the front
of the armrest. There is additional
storage under the armrest. Move the
armrest all the way to the rear
position, slide the cover back and
remove the tray.
For vehicles with a second row
center console, open each area to
access the storage compartment
inside.
To access, pull the handle down.
Instrument Panel Storage
This vehicle has an instrument
panel storage area located above
the radio. To open the cover,
press the button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
Floor Mats
2-51
{ CAUTION
If the floor mat has a snap retainer,
a grommet in the driver side floor
mat attaches to a hook on the floor
of the vehicle to secure the floor
mat. To remove the floor mat,
pull the mat towards the rear of the
vehicle until the grommet can be
removed from the hook.
Never open more than one of the
three latches at a time to help
avoid personal injury and damage
to the console.
Notice: Slide the front console
as far forward as it will go before
folding the second row console
forward to help prevent damage
to the consoles.
If the floor mat has a knob retainer,
a grommet in the floor mat
attaches to a knob on the floor of
the vehicle to secure the floor
mat. To remove the floor mat, turn
the knob till it is aligned with the
slot in the floor mat grommet
and pull the floor mat up. To
reinstall, center the slot in the floor
mat grommet with the knob on
the floor and set the mat in place.
Then turn the knob until it is
To access the upper storage area,
press the upper button (B) and
lift up. To access the lower storage
area, press the lower button (C)
and lift up. The top of the console
can be folded forward for increased
storage area. Lift up on handle
on the rear of the console (A) and
pull forward.
perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-52
Features and Controls
If you have the luggage carrier,
you can load things on top of your
vehicle. Crossrails are not standard
on this vehicle and must be
Luggage Carrier
Rear Seat Armrest
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest,
have two cupholders. Pull the
armrest down from the rear
{ CAUTION
purchased at your dealer/retailer.
If something is carried on top
of the vehicle that is longer
or wider than the luggage
seatback to access the cupholders.
Notice: Loading cargo on
the luggage carrier that weighs
more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of
the vehicle can damage the
vehicle. Load cargo so that it
rests as far forward as possible
and against the side rails, making
sure to fasten it securely.
Convenience Net
carrier — like paneling, plywood,
or a mattress — the wind can
catch it while the vehicle is being
driven. This can cause a driver
to lose control. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Items
may be carried inside. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the luggage carrier on top of
the vehicle.
Use the convenience net, located
in the rear, to store small loads
as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to
store heavy loads.
Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading your
vehicle. For more information on
vehicle capacity and loading,
page 4-18.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
as you are driving, check to make
sure the cargo is still securely
fastened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-53
There is an additional storage
Cargo Cover
Cargo Management
System
This vehicle has one of these cargo
management systems located in
the rear of the vehicle.
compartment on each side of the
system. To open, unlatch and lift
the panel up.
For vehicles with a cargo cover,
it can be used to cover items in
the rear of the vehicle. To install
the cover, place the loops on
each corner of the cover on the
four hooks in the rear of the
vehicle. The cover should be
stored securely when not in use.
To remove the cargo management
system:
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
2. Remove the side panels and
place inside.
Cargo Tie Downs
3. Loosen the retaining nuts on
each side of the system by
Four cargo tie-downs are located
in the rear compartment of the
vehicle. The tie-downs can be used
to secure small loads.
turning them counterclockwise.
4. Close the cover.
5. Pull up on the system by using
the built in handles and remove
it from the vehicle.
Cargo Management System with
a Removable Storage Area
To open, pull the handle toward
the rear of the vehicle and lift
the cover up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-54
Features and Controls
Sunroof
{ CAUTION
The vehicle may have a sunroof
over the front seats and a rear
sunroof over the second row seats.
The rear sunroof does not open.
The switches to operate the
front sunroof and rear sunshade
are located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror.
The ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate
the sunroof. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-20.
An improperly latched and closed
cargo cover, or cargo cover left in
the open position, could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver.
Someone could be injured.
Be sure to return the cover to the
closed position and latch before
driving. If the cover is removed,
always store it outside of the
vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
Cargo Management System with
a Removable Cover
To remove the cargo management
cover:
3. Remove the cover from the
vehicle and store outside of
the vehicle.
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
2. Pull the cover up making sure to
unhook the hinges at the rear of
the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features and Controls
2-55
Press and release the front of the
driver side switch to express-close
the sunroof.
The front sunshade must be opened
and closed manually. Push up on
the sunshade handle to open the
sunshade.
Notice: The rear sunshade could
be damaged if you attempt to
open or close it manually. Do not
manually open or close the rear
sunshade.
To open the rear sunshade,
located over the second row seats,
press and release the rear of
the passenger side switch.
Press and release the front of the
switch to close the sunshade.
Vent: From the closed position,
press and hold the front of the driver
side switch to vent the sunroof.
Press and hold the rear of the driver
side switch to close the sunroof.
Express-open/Express-close:
From the closed position, press and
release the rear of the driver side
switch to express-open the sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-56
Features and Controls
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s)
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-3
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-5
The main components of the
instrument panel are listed here:
Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-125.
| Hazard Warning Flasher: Press
this button located on the instrument
panel below the audio system, to
make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press again to turn the flashers off.
page 3-5.
O. Center Console Shift Lever.
See “Console Shift Lever” under
page 3-31.
on page 3-9. Traction Control
System (TCS) Disable Button
Power Liftgate on page 2-11
(If Equipped).
on page 3-44.
The turn signals do not work while
the hazard warning flashers are on.
page 2-50.
page 3-103 (If Equipped).
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols
on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
page 3-17.
T. Passenger Air Bag Status
Indicator. See Passenger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Instrument Panel
Tilt and Telescopic
Steering Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Turn and Lane-Change
Lever
Signals
The steering wheel can be adjusted.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the
steering column includes the
following:
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a
lane change. Hold it there until the
lane change is completed. If the
lever is briefly pressed and released,
the turn signal flashes three times.
G : Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
N : Windshield Wipers
Pull the lever down to move the
steering wheel up or down and in
or out. Pull the lever up to lock
the steering wheel in place.
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly
or does not come on, a signal bulb
might be burned out.
L : Windshield Washer
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on
the pages following.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
page 5-92.
For information on the headlamps,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-7
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
If either one of the turn signals are
left on and the vehicle has been
driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),
a chime will sound.
With the turn signal lever in the
low-beam position, pull the lever
toward you momentarily to switch
to high-beam, to signal that you are
going to pass.
6 (Delay): Adjusts the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles
becomes shorter as the band
is moved to the top of the lever.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
If the headlamps are on, they will
return to low-beam when the lever is
released.
1 (Low Speed): For steady wiping
at low speed.
2 (High Speed): For steady wiping
at high speed.
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer: Push the turn signal/
multifunction lever away from you
to turn the high beams on.
For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps,
the flash-to-pass feature does not
work while the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are on.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If the
blades are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If they
become damaged, install new blades
or blade inserts. See Windshield
page 5-38.
Pull the lever towards you to return to
low beams.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer lever
is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Heavy snow or ice can overload
the wipers. A circuit breaker stops
them until the motor cools.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
This indicator light turns on in
the instrument panel cluster when
the high beam headlamps are on.
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist
for a single wiping cycle and then
release. The wipers stop after one
wipe. Hold the band on 8 longer,
for more wipe cycles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Instrument Panel
Heated Windshield Washer
cycle can take up to 40 seconds
to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/
wipe cycle, it can take up to
20 seconds for each of the remaining
cycles. The system turns off
automatically after four wipe cycles
or the button can be pressed again to
turn it off.
Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated
windshield washer fluid system,
it helps to clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield. This
feature only works with the front
wiper system.
J (Washer Fluid): Press the
button located at the end of the
turn signal/multifunction lever, to
spray washer fluid on the windshield.
The wipers clear the windshield and
either stop or return to the preset
speed. The ignition key must be in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for
this to work. See Windshield Washer
Washer Fluid.
Under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam might flow out
of the washer nozzles for a short
period of time before washer fluid
is sprayed. This is normal.
{ CAUTION
The button is located to the left
of the steering column below the
instrument panel brightness
control knob.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH
WIPES PENDING is displayed on
the DIC when the washer system is
heating the fluid. WASHER FLUID
LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when
the washer fluid is low. See DIC
page 3-56.
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
Press the heated washer fluid button
to activate the heated windshield
washer fluid system. This activation
begins four heated wash/wipe
windshield, blocking your vision.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
is displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the washer fluid
is low. See DIC Warnings and
cycles. The first heated wash/wipe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-9
Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash
button is located on the instrument
panel below the climate control
system.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be
maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the
rear wiper on and off. The wiper
speed cannot be changed.
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control is disengaged.
Y (Wash): Press to spray washer
fluid on the rear window. The window
wiper will also come on. Release the
button when enough fluid has been
sprayed on the window. The rear
wiper will run a few more cycles
after it is released. If the rear wiper
function was already on, prior to
pressing the wash button, it stays
on until the wiper button is pressed
again.
{ CAUTION
The cruise control buttons are
located on left side of the steering
wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise
control on and off. The indicator
comes on when cruise control is on.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press to make the vehicle accelerate
or resume to a previously set speed.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid that is in the windshield
washer reservoir. See Windshield
SET– : Press to set the speed or
make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise
control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Instrument Panel
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the
parking brake is set, or if the master
cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged. But it does not need
to be reset.
There are two ways to reduce the
vehicle speed while using cruise
control:
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been
set to the desired speed.
•
Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
lower speed desired is reached,
then release it.
Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph
(40 km/h) or greater, press the
+RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previously
set speed and stays there.
{ CAUTION
•
To slow down in very small
amounts, press the SET– button
briefly. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
If you leave your cruise control
on when you are not using cruise,
you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want
to use cruise control.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the
vehicle speed while using cruise
control:
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase vehicle speed. When you
take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previously set cruise speed.
•
Press and hold the +RES button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached,
then release it.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press and release the SET–
button located on the steering
wheel.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
•
To increase vehicle speed in
small increments, press the
+RES button briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-11
Using Cruise Control on Hills
The exterior lamps control has four
positions:
Exterior Lamps
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going downhill,
you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle speed
down. When the brakes are applied
the cruise control is disengaged.
O (Off): Turns the automatic light
control on or off.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Press the [ button.
It controls the following systems:
•
•
•
Taillamps
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Press the T button.
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Taillamps
Erasing Speed Memory
Parking Lamps
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Instrument Panel
2 (Headlamps): Turns on
the headlamps together with
the following lamps listed below.
A warning chime sounds if the
driver door is opened when the
ignition switch is off and the
headlamps are on.
Delayed Headlamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System
Delayed headlamps provide a
period of exterior lighting as you
leave the area around your vehicle.
This feature is activated when the
headlamps are on due to the
automatic headlamps control feature,
and when the ignition is turned off.
The headlamps remain on until the
exterior lamps control is moved to
the parking lamps position or until
the pre-selected delayed headlamp
lighting period has ended.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
The DRL system makes either the
low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness or the DRL lights,
for vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps when
the following conditions are met:
# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):
Turns on the fog lamps.
If the ignition is turned off with the
headlamps switch in the parking
lamps or headlamps position, the
delayed headlamps cycle will not
occur.
•
•
•
The ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
To disable the delayed headlamps
feature or change the time of delay,
The engine is running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-13
When the DRL are on, the regular
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
and other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel and cluster
will also not be lit.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel
Brightness
# (Fog Lamps): For vehicles
with fog lamps, the button is located
on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness):
The knob with this symbol on it is
located next to the exterior lamps
control to the left of the steering
wheel. Push the knob in all the way
until it extends out and then turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to brighten or dim the lights. Push the
knob back in when finished.
For vehicles with HID headlamps,
if the DRL are on and the left or right
turn signal lamp is turned on, the
left or right DRL will go off.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position for the fog lamps to
come on.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings.
The other lamps that come on
with the headlamps will also
come on.
Press # to turn the fog lamps
on or off. A light will come on in
the instrument panel cluster.
Courtesy Lamps
When a door is opened, the
courtesy lamps automatically
come on. They make it easier
when entering and exiting the
vehicle. The lamps can also be
turned on manually by fully turning
the instrument panel brightness
control clockwise.
When the headlamps are changed
to high-beam, the fog lamps
also go off.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and
the DRL will come on.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be
on along with the fog lamps.
The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Do not cover the light sensor on
top of the instrument panel because
it works with the DRL.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent
of the automatic courtesy lamps,
when the doors are closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Instrument Panel
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates
the interior for a period of time after
all the doors have been closed.
For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set
time whenever the unlock symbol
is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one.
The dome lamps automatically
come on when a door is opened,
unless the dome lamp override
button is pressed in.
The ignition must be off for delayed
entry lighting to work. Immediately
after all the doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature
continues to work until one of
the following occurs:
The lamps can also be turned on
and off by turning the instrument
panel brightness control clockwise
to the farthest position.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay
on while it is open and then turn off
automatically about 20 seconds after
the door is closed. If the unlock
symbol is pressed and no door is
opened, the lamps turn off after
about 20 seconds.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
•
•
•
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
The doors are locked.
An illumination period of about
25 seconds has elapsed.
Entry lighting includes a feature
called theater dimming. With theater
dimming, the lamps do not turn off at
the end of the delay time. Instead,
they slowly dim and then go out.
The delay time is canceled if the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
or the power door lock switch is
pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.
The dome lamp override sets the
dome lamps to remain off or come on
automatically when a door is opened.
If during the illumination period
a door is opened, the timed
illumination period is canceled
and the interior lamps remain on.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press
the button in and the dome lamps
remain off when a door is opened.
Press the button again to return it
to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
When the ignition is on, illuminated
entry is inactive, which means the
courtesy lamps will not come on
unless a door is opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-15
When the battery’s state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent
overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert
will be displayed.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior
for a period of time after the key
is removed from the ignition.
Parade Dimming
Parade mode automatically prohibits
the dimming of the instrument panel
displays during the daylight while
the headlamps are on so that the
displays are still able to be seen.
The ignition must be off for delayed
exit lighting to work. When the
key is removed, interior illumination
activates and remains on until
one of the following occurs:
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that
also act as the dome lamp. Press
the button to turn them on and off.
•
•
The ignition is in ON/RUN.
The power door locks are
activated.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles. This
is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at
idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Electric Power
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery’s temperature and
state of charge. It then adjusts
the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
•
An illumination period of
20 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period
a door is opened, the timed
illumination period will be canceled
and the interior lamps will remain
on because a door is open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Instrument Panel
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on,
such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Normally, these actions occur
in steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce
the electrical loads as much as
possible. See DIC Warnings and
Battery Run-Down
Protection
This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/
map lamps, visor vanity lamps or
trunk lamp are accidentally left on.
If any of these lamps are left on,
they automatically turn off after
10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
The lamps will not come back on
again until one of the following
occurs:
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
•
•
The ignition is turned on.
The exterior lamps control is
turned off, then on again.
The headlamps will timeout after
10 minutes, if they are manually
turned on with the ignition on or off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-17
the battery. Power is always
supplied to the outlets. Always
unplug electrical equipment when
not in use and do not plug in
equipment that exceeds the
maximum 20 ampere rating.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage
rating of 20 amperes. Check
with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power
Outlet(s)
The vehicle has three 12-volt
outlets which can be used to plug
in electrical equipment, such as a
cellular telephone, a compact disc
player, etc.
Certain accessory plugs may
not be compatible to the accessory
power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle and adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the power accessory
outlets.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment.
The power outlets are located on the
instrument panel below the climate
controls, at the rear of the center
console, and in the rear cargo area.
Lift the cover to access the outlet.
Close the cover when not using the
outlet.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by the warranty.
Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to the vehicle can
damage it or keep other
components from working as
they should. The repairs would
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Instrument Panel
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
less than 150 watts is plugged into
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electrical equipment
and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power
outlet:
Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current
For vehicles with this power outlet,
it can be used to plug in electrical
equipment that uses a maximum
limit of 150 watts.
•
Equipment with high
initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
The indicator light does not come
on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF
or if no equipment is plugged into
the outlet.
•
Other equipment requiring
an extremely stable
power supply such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor
lamps, etc.
If equipment is connected using
more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset
the circuit, unplug the item and
plug it back in or turn the Remote
Accessory Power (RAP) off and then
back on. See Retained Accessory
power restarts when equipment
using 150 watts or less is plugged
into the outlet and a system fault is
not detected.
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-19
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
temperature of the air flowing
from the system.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this
system.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise
to change the current airflow mode.
By positioning the right knob
between two modes, a combination
of those two modes is selected.
H (Vent): Air is directed to
the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed
towards the windshield and side
window outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
A. Fan Control
9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the
way counterclockwise to turn the
front climate control system off.
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Air Conditioning
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
F. Recirculation
G. Rear Window Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Instrument Panel
For quicker cool down on hot days:
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some of the air
directed to the windshield, side
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air.
Recirculation cannot be selected
while in floor mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode quickly
clears the windshield of fog or frost.
Air is directed to the windshield
and side window vents, with some
to the floor vents. In this mode,
outside air is pulled inside the
vehicle. Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode.
The air conditioning system runs
automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is less
than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
1. Open the windows to let hot
air escape.
2. Select H mode.
3. Select #.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor
outlets, and side window vents.
When this mode is selected, the
system turns off recirculation and
runs the air conditioning unless the
outside temperature is less than
40°F (4°C). Recirculation cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
6. Close the windows after the hot
air has escaped.
7. Once the vehicle’s interior
temperature is below the outside
temperature, select @ mode
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off. An indicator light comes on
when A/C is on. The air conditioning
system does not operate when
the outside temperature is below
40°F (4°C). The indicator light
flashes three times and turns off
when outside conditions affect
air conditioning operation.
for faster cooling.
Using recirculation for long periods
of time could cause the air inside
of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after
the inside of the vehicle has cooled,
turn the recirculation mode off.
This is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-21
The air conditioning system
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with floor, defrost, or defogging
modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes
three times and turns off. The air
conditioning also comes on when
this mode is activated unless the
outside air temperature is less than
40°F (4°C). While in recirculation
mode the windows can fog when
the weather is cold and damp.
To clear the fog, select either the
defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed.
Rear Window Defogger
removes moisture from the air, so
a small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while idling or after
turning off the engine. This is normal.
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear
window defogger stays on for about
10 minutes, before automatically
turning off. The defogger will also
turn off when the engine is turned off.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn
the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light comes on when
recirculation is on. When the engine
is turned off, the recirculation mode
automatically turns off and must be
re-selected when the engine is
turned on again.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
This mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air
and odors from entering the vehicle.
REAR (Rear Climate Control):
Press to turn the rear heating
and air conditioning on or off.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, fog or frost
is cleared from the surface of
the mirror when < is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Instrument Panel
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Display Function
Each time the temperature, mode,
or fan control buttons are pressed,
the climate control display shows
that function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
temperature is displayed on the
instrument panel cluster.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this
system.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
While the system is off, outside air
still enters through the floor outlets,
but the air delivery mode can be
adjusted.
The climate control system will
also turn on if either the fan control,
defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning
buttons are pressed.
A. Fan Control
H. Display
B. AUTO
I. Power (On/Off)
J. Rear Window Defogger
K. Air Conditioning
L. PASS (Passenger)
C. Defrost
D. Recirculation
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
F. Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Driver Side Temperature Control
M. Passenger Side Temperature
Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-23
2. Set the temperature for the driver
and passenger.
Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
The driver and passenger side
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery,
and the fan speed.
To find a comfortable setting,
start with a 73°F (22°C)
temperature buttons are used to
adjust the temperature of the
air coming through the system.
The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off since
outside air still enters the vehicle,
unless the recirculation mode
is selected. See “Recirculation”
later in this section.
temperature setting and allow
about 20 minutes for the system
to regulate. Use the driver’s side
or passenger side temperature
buttons to adjust the temperature
setting as necessary. The system
will remain at the selected setting.
Choosing the warmest or coolest
temperatures does not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool more
quickly.
To use automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the
current temperature(s) selected
and AUTO is shown on the
display. The current air delivery
mode and fan speed also appear
for approximately five seconds.
Driver Side Temperature
Control: Press the + or − buttons
to increase or decrease the driver
side temperature. The driver side
temperature display will show the
temperature setting.
When AUTO is selected, the
air conditioning and air inlet
are automatically controlled.
The air conditioning runs when
the outside temperature is over
40°F (4°C). The system is
automatically set to outside
air, unless it is hot outside and
then the air inlet changes to
recirculation mode to help quickly
cool the vehicle. The recirculation
indicator light will come on.
To avoid blowing cold air in
cold weather, the system delays
turning on the fan until warm air is
available. Press the fan control to
override this delay and select the
fan speed.
Passenger Side Temperature
Control: Press the + or − buttons
to increase or decrease the
passenger side temperature.
The passenger side display will
show the temperature setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Instrument Panel
PASS (Passenger): Press to
set the passenger temperature to
match the driver temperature setting.
The PASS indicator will turn off.
When the passenger temperature
setting is different than the driver
setting, the PASS indicator
comes on.
H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press to change the direction of the
airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some of the
air directed to the windshield,
side window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system
uses outside air.
press H or G until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing a
mode button while the system is
off changes the air delivery mode
without turning the system on.
Press a mode button while in
automatic control to place the
system into manual control.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor
outlets, and side window vents.
When this mode is selected, the
system turns off recirculation and
runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is
less than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Manual Operation
The air delivery mode or fan speed
can be manually adjusted.
The air delivery mode setting still
displays, but the word AUTO no
longer displays, and the AUTO
button indicator light turns off.
D / C (Fan Control): Press to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
Pressing D or C while in automatic
control places the fan speed
under manual control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
0 (Defrost): Press to turn the
defrost on or off. This mode quickly
clears the windshield of fog or frost.
Air is directed to the windshield,
side window, and floor vents.
In this mode, outside air is
The air delivery mode remains in
automatic control. The fan setting
still displays, but the word AUTO
no longer displays, and the AUTO
button indicator light turns off.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed
towards the windshield and side
window outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
pulled inside the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-25
The air conditioning system runs
automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is less than
40°F (4°C).
On hot days, open the windows
briefly to let hot inside air escape.
This helps reduce the time it
takes for the interior of the vehicle
to cool down.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning): Press
to turn the air conditioning (A/C)
on and off. An indicator light comes
on when A/C is on.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air,
so a small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while idling or after
turning off the engine. This is normal.
The A/C does not work when
the outside temperature is below
While in defrost mode, if the PASS
button is pressed, the PASS button
indicator flashes three times to show
that the passenger climate control
system cannot be activated. If the
passenger temperature buttons are
adjusted while in defrost mode, the
driver temperature indicator will
change. The passenger temperature
will not be displayed.
40°F (4°C). If # is pressed the
indicator flashes three times and
turns off to show that the A/C mode
is not available. If the A/C is on and
the outside temperature drops below
a temperature which is too cool for
air conditioning to be effective, the
A/C indicator turns off to show that
the A/C mode has been canceled.
@ (Recirculation): Press to
turn the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light comes on when
recirculation is on. When the engine
is turned off, the recirculation mode
automatically turns off and must be
re-selected when the engine is
turned on again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Instrument Panel
This mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air
and odors from entering the vehicle.
Rear Window Defogger
Sensors
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with floor, defog, or defrosting
modes. If recirculation is selected in
these modes, the indicator flashes
three times and turns off. The air
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated.
While in recirculation mode the
windows can fog when the weather
is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear
window defogger stays on for
about 10 minutes, before turning off.
The defogger also turns off when
the engine is turned off. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
The solar sensor, located in the
defrost grille in the middle of the
instrument panel, monitors the solar
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
or the system will not work properly.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, fog or frost
is cleared from the surface of
the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed.
REAR: Press to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on
or off. See Rear Air Conditioning
and Heating System on page 3-28
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions
may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
Operation Tips
3-27
The climate control system uses
the information from these sensors
to maintain comfort settings by
adjusting the temperature, fan
speed, and the air delivery mode.
The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will
also be used as needed to maintain
cool outlet temperatures.
•
Clear away any ice, snow, or
leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into
the vehicle.
•
•
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Keep the path under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside the vehicle
more effectively.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the slider switch in the center
of the outlet, to change the direction
of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel
near the outlet to control the amount
of air flow or to shut off the airflow.
The interior temperature sensor
located on the instrument panel to
the right of the steering column,
measures the temperature of the
air inside the vehicle.
•
If fogging reoccurs while in
vent or bi-level modes with mild
temperature throughout the
vehicle, turn on the air conditioner
to reduce windshield fogging.
Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
There is also an exterior
temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads the
outside air temperature and helps
maintain the temperature inside the
vehicle. Any cover on the front of the
vehicle could cause a false reading
in the displayed temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Instrument Panel
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to 9 to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change
the airflow direction.
H (Vent): Air is directed through
the overhead outlets.
A. Fan Control
An indicator comes on when the
rear system is on. The system also
turns on if any of the rear controls
are adjusted.
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
through the rear floor outlets, as
well as the overhead outlets.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control settings. It comes on
when REAR is pressed.
For vehicles with the rear climate
control system, the controls
are located on the rear of the center
console. The system can also be
controlled with the front controls.
6 (Floor): Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under
the third row seats.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow according
to the settings of the rear controls.
It comes on when any rear control
is adjusted.
Press the REAR button on the front
climate control system to turn the
rear climate control system on or off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-29
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
Electronic Climate Controls
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control settings. It comes on
when REAR is pressed.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow according
to the settings of the rear controls.
It comes on when any rear control
is adjusted.
D C (Fan Control): Press the fan
up or down buttons to increase
or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Press +
or − to increase or decrease the
air temperature. The temperature
settings will display in 0-12
increments, going from the
coolest (0) to the warmest (12)
setting.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
Press the REAR button on the front
climate control system to turn the
rear climate control system on or off.
The system also turns on if any of the
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
rear controls, except for the C are
pressed. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on.
For vehicles with the rear climate
control system, the controls are
located on the rear of the center
console.
The system can also be turned off,
by pressing and holding the C button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Instrument Panel
Gages can indicate when there may
be or is a problem with one of the
vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to
indicate a problem with the vehicle.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press to manually change the
direction of the airflow. Repeatedly
press the button until the desired
mode appears on the display.
Warning Lights,
Gages, and Indicators
Warning lights and gages can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could
prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while driving,
or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the
section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting
to do repairs can be costly and even
dangerous.
H (Vent): Air is directed through
the overhead outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed
through the rear floor outlets, as
well as the overhead outlets.
Warning lights come on when there
may be or is a problem with one
of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when
the engine is started to indicate they
are working.
6 (Floor): Air is directed through
the floor outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located under
the third row seats.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-31
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about
how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Instrument Panel
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Speedometer and
Odometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle’s speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
The driver safety belt reminder light
on the instrument panel cluster.
The odometer shows how far
the vehicle has been driven,
in either miles or kilometers.
When the engine is started this light
and the chime come on and stay
on for several seconds to remind
the passenger to fasten their safety
belt. The light also begins to flash.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. If the vehicle needs a new
odometer installed, the new one is
set to the mileage total of the old
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was
installed. If the mileage is unknown,
the label should then indicate
When the engine is started this
light and the chime come on and
stay on for several seconds to
remind the driver to fasten the safety
belt. The light also begins to flash.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is
moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
“previous mileage unknown”.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such as
a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,
laptop or other electronic device.
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor chime
comes on.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-33
To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the
seat or buckle the safety belt
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
page 1-47.
This light will come on and stay
on for several seconds when the
vehicle is started. Then the light
should go out.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle has been started
or comes on when while driving,
the airbag system may not work
properly. Have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Instrument Panel
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not
see the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both
status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights
or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-55
for important safety information.
The instrument panel has a
{ CAUTION
passenger airbag status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have
the vehicle serviced right away.
page 3-33 for more information,
including important safety
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
United States
information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Canada
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-35
on page 3-56 for more information.
This is normal. Readings between
the low and high warning zones
indicate the normal operating range.
Charging System Light
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn
off all accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Readings in the low warning zone
may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
Voltmeter Gage
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running,
as a check to show the light is
working. It should go out when the
engine is started.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
message will appear in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and/or the
charging system light will come on.
If the light stays on, or comes
on while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
When the engine is not running,
but the ignition is on, this gage
shows the battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
information.
However, readings in either warning
zone may indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system.
Have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
When the engine is running, this
gage shows the condition of the
charging system. The vehicle’s
charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of charge of the
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
When this light comes on, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) also
displays the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Instrument Panel
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn if there is a problem.
released. The pedal may be harder
to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Brake System Warning
Light
This vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system is divided into two parts.
If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop the
vehicle. For good braking both
parts need to be working.
This light may also come on due
to low brake fluid. See Brakes
on page 5-27 for more information.
{ CAUTION
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will also come
on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking
brake does not release fully. If it
stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, it means there is a
brake problem.
The brake system might not
be working properly if the brake
system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light
on can lead to a crash. If the light
is still on after the vehicle has been
pulled off the road and carefully
stopped, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the warning light comes on,
there is a brake problem. Have the
brake system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
United States
Canada
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-37
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light
A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady. Then start
the engine again to reset the system.
If the ABS light stays on, or comes
on again while driving, the vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on,
the vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes
on briefly when the engine is started.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is
working normally the indicator light
goes off.
If the light does not come on,
have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see
page 3-56 for all brake related DIC
messages.
If it stays on, or comes on while
driving, there could be a problem
with the StabiliTrak system and
the vehicle might need service.
When this warning light is on,
the system is off and will not limit
wheel spin.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on while
driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Instrument Panel
This light flashes when the
StabiliTrak system is active.
If this happens pull over and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage
If the StabiliTrak system warning
light comes on and stays on for
an extended period of time when
the system is turned on, the vehicle
information.
page 5-23 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause the vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23. The vehicle’s engine
could be damaged, and it might
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature
warning light on.
United States
Canada
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Warning Light
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature. Under normal
driving conditions the gage will read
210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage
pointer is near 260°F (125 °C), the
engine is too hot.
This light also comes on briefly
when starting the vehicle. If it does
not, see your dealer/retailer.
It means that the engine coolant
has overheated. If the vehicle has
been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on when
the engine has overheated.
page 5-23 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-39
When the Light is On Steady
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction
This indicates that one or
more of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
A tire pressure message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC),
can accompany the light. See
page 3-56 for more information.
Stop and check the tires as soon
as it is safe to do so. If underinflated,
inflate to the proper pressure.
If the vehicle has a tire pressure
monitoring system, the tire pressure
light provides information about tire
pressures and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. The light should
come on briefly as the engine is
started. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
more information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there could be
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes for
about a minute and stays on steady
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. This sequence repeats with
every ignition cycle. See Tire
This light comes on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
page 5-46 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Instrument Panel
If the check engine light comes
on and stays on, while the engine is
running, this indicates that there is
an OBD II problem and service is
required.
Notice: Modifications made to
the engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of
the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this
light to come on. Modifications
to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the
emission controls might not
work as well, the vehicle’s fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-41
If the light continues to flash,
when it is safe to do so, stop
the vehicle. Find a safe place to
park the vehicle. Turn the key
off, wait at least 10 seconds, and
restart the engine. If the light is
still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly
hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
installed should turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand
used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn
the light off.
•
•
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has been
detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
page 5-5.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer/retailer can
check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical
or electrical problems that might
have developed.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected by checking the
following items:
•
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
page 5-8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly
changed into gear, misfiring,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Instrument Panel
inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II
system readiness, your dealer/
retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine
oil maintenance can damage
the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this
manual for changing engine oil.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
•
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the
light is not on.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started. If it
does not come on have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION
•
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II (on-board
diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem.
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-43
information.
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
This light comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
For more information, see
page 2-16.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
information.
This light comes on when the
Tow/Haul mode has been activated.
Fog Lamp Light
For more information, see
Highbeam On Light
On vehicles with fog lamps, this
light comes on when the fog lamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
information.
The highbeam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Instrument Panel
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information
on page 3-56.
Fuel Gage
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information
about your vehicle. It also displays
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
Here are some situations that may
occur with the fuel gage. None of
these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gage shows how much fuel the
vehicle has left in the tank.
All messages will appear in the DIC
display located at the top of the
instrument panel cluster.
•
At the gas station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gage
reads full.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates
the side of the vehicle the fuel
door is on.
The DIC comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay,
the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before
the engine was turned off.
•
It takes a little more or less fuel to
fill up than the fuel gage indicated.
For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or
less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
The gage will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel,
the vehicles fuel tank should be
filled soon.
The DIC also displays a shift lever
position indicator on the bottom
line of the display. See Automatic
•
The gage goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off.
page 2-24 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-45
The outside air temperature and
compass, if equipped, also displays
on the DIC when viewing the trip
and fuel information. The outside air
temperature automatically appears
in the top right corner of the DIC
display. If there is a problem with the
system that controls the temperature
display, the numbers will be replaced
with dashes. If this occurs, have
the vehicle serviced. The compass
will be shown in the bottom right
corner of the DIC display. See DIC
information.
DIC Buttons
DIC Operation
and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle has DIC buttons,
the information below explains the
operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
instrument panel. See Instrument
Panel Overview on page 3-4
for more information.
The buttons are the set/reset,
customization, vehicle information,
and trip/fuel buttons. The button
functions are detailed in the
following pages.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to
turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see
“DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons)” later in this section
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-65
for the displays available.
The DIC also allows some features
to be customized. See DIC Vehicle
page 3-65 for more information.
U (Customization): Press this
button to customize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See DIC
information.
If your vehicle does not have
DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)”
later in this section for the displays
available.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons,
you can also use the trip odometer
reset stem to view the odometer
and trip odometers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Instrument Panel
on page 3-56. You should change
the oil as soon as you can.
In addition to the engine oil life
system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3
for more information.
Vehicle Information Menu
Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to display the oil life, park
assist on vehicles with this feature,
units, tire pressure readings on
vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, and compass
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button
until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
This display shows an estimate of
the oil’s remaining useful life. If you
see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on
the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine
oil life system will alert you to change
the oil on a schedule consistent with
your driving conditions.
calibration and zone setting
on vehicles with this feature.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this
button to display the odometer,
trip odometers, fuel range, average
economy, timer, fuel used, and
average speed.
Remember, you must reset the
OIL LIFE display yourself after each
oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the
OIL LIFE display accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
page 5-15.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-47
PARK ASSIST
UNITS
If a low or high tire pressure
condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a
specific tire will appear in the
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
press the vehicle information button
until PARK ASSIST displays.
Press the vehicle information
button until UNITS displays.
This display allows you to select
between English or Metric units of
measurement. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units.
All of the vehicle information will
then be displayed in the unit of
measurement selected.
This display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select
between ON or OFF. If you choose
ON, the system will be turned on.
If you choose OFF, the system will
be turned off. The URPA system
automatically turns back on after
each vehicle start. When the URPA
system is turned off and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC
will display the PARK ASSIST OFF
message as a reminder that the
system has been turned off.
If the tire pressure display shows
dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until
the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press
the vehicle information button again
until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
This display allows you to match
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters to your vehicle.
This procedure will erase all
previously learned transmitters.
Therefore, they must be relearned
as additional transmitters.
Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Instrument Panel
To match an RKE transmitter to
your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information
COMPASS ZONE SETTING
To switch between English and
metric measurements, see “UNITS”
earlier in this section.
This display will be available if the
vehicle has a compass. See DIC
information.
button until PRESS V TO
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
displays.
TRIP A and TRIP B
Press the trip/fuel button until
TRIP A or TRIP B displays.
This display shows the current
distance traveled in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for each trip odometer. Both trip
odometers can be used at the same
time. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also display the trip
odometers.
COMPASS RECALIBRATION
2. Press the set/reset button until
REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons on the first
This display will be available if the
vehicle has a compass. See DIC
information.
Blank Display
transmitter at the same time
for about 15 seconds.
This display shows no information.
On vehicles with memory recall
seats, the first transmitter learned
will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating
that the transmitter is matched.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing
the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem while the
desired trip odometer is displayed.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
to scroll through the following
menu items:
ODOMETER
4. To match additional transmitters
at this time, repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters
matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode,
you must cycle the key to
LOCK/OFF.
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset.
Press the trip/fuel button until
ODOMETER displays. This display
shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles
(kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be
used if the trip odometer is not
reset at the beginning of the trip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-49
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the set/reset button
for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number
of miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was
moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will
accumulate mileage. For example,
if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again,
and then the retro-active reset
feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the
vehicle begins moving, the display
will then increase to 5.1 miles
(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
RANGE
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving. Fuel range cannot
be reset.
Press the trip/fuel button until
RANGE displays. This display
shows the approximate number
of remaining miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) the vehicle can be
driven without refueling. The display
will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
AVG (Average) ECONOMY
Press the trip/fuel button until
AVG ECONOMY displays.
The fuel range estimate is based
on an average of the vehicle’s fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This estimate will
change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the
This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based
on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this
menu item was reset. To reset
AVG ECONOMY, press and hold
the set/reset button.
If the retro-active reset feature is
activated after the vehicle is started,
but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last ignition
cycle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Instrument Panel
TIMER
FUEL USED
DIC Operation
Press the trip/fuel button until
TIMER displays. This display can
be used as a timer.
Press the trip/fuel button until
FUEL USED displays. This display
shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last
reset of this menu item. To reset
the fuel used information, press
and hold the set/reset button while
FUEL USED is displayed.
and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, the information below
To start the timer, press the
set/reset button while TIMER is
displayed. The display will show
the amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset, not
including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted
as long as the ignition is on, even
if another display is being shown
on the DIC. The timer will record
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will return to zero.
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which
can be accessed by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will
also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
AVG (Average) SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until
AVG SPEED displays. This display
shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based
on the various vehicle speeds
recorded since the last reset of this
value. To reset the value to zero,
press and hold the set/reset button.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle
system information, and warning
messages if a system problem
is detected.
To stop the timer, press the set/
reset button briefly while TIMER is
displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press
and hold the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-51
If your vehicle does not have
DIC buttons, you can use the trip
odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: odometer, trip
odometers, oil life, park assist menu
for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter programming, units,
and display language.
TRIP A or TRIP B
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display
Press the trip odometer reset stem
until TRIP A or TRIP B displays.
This display shows the current
distance traveled in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for each trip odometer. Both
trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the
ignition was last turned on and
the vehicle was moving. Once the
vehicle begins moving, the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was
driven 5 miles (8 km) before it
Each trip odometer can be reset
to zero separately by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset
stem while the desired trip odometer
is displayed.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons,
you can use the trip odometer reset
stem to view the following displays:
odometer and trip odometers.
is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated,
the display will show 5 miles (8 km).
As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles
(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem
Menu Items
ODOMETER
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset.
This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles
(kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be
used if the trip odometer is not
reset at the beginning of the trip.
If the retro-active reset feature is
activated after the vehicle is started,
but before it begins moving, the
display will show the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
Press the trip odometer reset
stem until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance
the vehicle has been driven in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
To switch between English and
metric measurements, see “UNITS”
later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Instrument Panel
OIL LIFE
the Maintenance Schedule in
this manual. See Scheduled
more information.
Once in this display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem to select
between ON or OFF. If you choose
ON, the system will be turned on.
If you choose OFF, the system will
be turned off. The URPA system
automatically turns back on after
each vehicle start. When the URPA
system is turned off and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC
will display the PARK ASSIST OFF
message as a reminder that the
system has been turned off. See
Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34
for more information.
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). Press the trip
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display
shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine
oil life system will alert you to change
the oil on a schedule consistent with
your driving conditions.
Remember, you must reset the
OIL LIFE display yourself after each
oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the
OIL LIFE display accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
page 5-15.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
on page 3-56. You should change
the oil as soon as you can. See
to the engine oil life system
PARK ASSIST
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, press the
trip odometer reset stem until PARK
ASSIST displays. This display allows
the system to be turned on or off.
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-53
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
4. To match additional transmitters
at this time, repeat Step 3.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). This display
allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your
vehicle. This procedure will erase
all previously learned transmitters.
Therefore, they must be relearned
as additional transmitters.
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). This display
allows you to select the language
in which the DIC messages will
appear. To select a language:
Each vehicle can have a
maximum of eight transmitters
matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode,
you must cycle the key to
LOCK/OFF.
1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE
displays.
UNITS
To match an RKE transmitter to
your vehicle:
1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until RELEARN REMOTE
KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and
unlock buttons on the first
transmitter at the same time
for about 15 seconds.
2. Continue to press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem to scroll
through all of the available
languages.
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). Press the
trip odometer reset stem until UNITS
displays. This display allows you
to select between English or Metric
units of measurement. Once in
this display, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC
units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit
of measurement selected.
The available languages are
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
and NO CHANGE.
3. Once the desired language
is displayed, release the trip
odometer reset stem to set
your choice.
On vehicles with memory recall
seats, the first transmitter
learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that
the transmitter is matched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Instrument Panel
Compass variance is the difference
between the earth’s magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where
you live, the compass may give false
readings. The compass must be set
to the variance zone in which the
vehicle is traveling.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a
compass in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon
leaving the factory. Your dealer/
retailer will set the correct zone
for your location.
To adjust for compass variance,
use the following procedure:
Under certain circumstances,
such as during a long distance
cross-country trip or moving
to a new state or province, it will
be necessary to compensate
for compass variance by resetting
the zone through the DIC if the
zone is not set correctly.
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
2. Find the vehicle’s current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving.
Only set it when the vehicle
is in P (Park).
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through and select the
appropriate variance zone.
Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until
the vehicle heading, for example,
N for North, is displayed in
the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary,
calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-55
Compass Calibration
Such interference may be caused by
a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light,
magnetic note pad holder, or any
other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item,
then turn on the vehicle and calibrate
the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an
open parking lot, where driving
the vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.
3. Press the set/reset button to start
the compass calibration.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle
in tight circles at less than
5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
few seconds when the calibration
is complete. The DIC display will
then return to the previous menu.
To calibrate the compass, use the
following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
If CAL should ever appear in the
DIC display, the compass should
be calibrated.
1. Before calibrating the compass,
make sure the compass zone
is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located.
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the
compass.
See “Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof, climate
controls, seats, etc. during the
calibration procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56
Instrument Panel
messages that appear on the display
seriously and remember that clearing
the messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct
the problem.
message is still on after putting on
the full-size tire, you need to reset
the warning message. To reset the
warning message, turn the ignition
off and then back on again after
30 seconds. If the message stays on,
see your dealer/retailer right away.
on page 4-8 for more information.
DIC Warnings and
Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status
of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by
the driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear
one after another.
The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed
and some information about them.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can
press any of the DIC buttons on the
instrument panel or the trip odometer
reset stem on the instrument panel
cluster to acknowledge that you
received the messages and to
clear them from the display.
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays when there is a compact
spare tire on the vehicle, when
the Antilock Brake System (ABS)
warning light comes on, or when the
rear differential fluid is overheating.
This message turns off when
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned off.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
the differential fluid cools.
Some messages cannot be cleared
from the DIC display because they
are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned on.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
The AWD system is disabled until
the compact spare tire is replaced
by a full-size tire. If the warning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-57
more information.
also shows the tire pressure values.
See “DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this
section. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light
comes on. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 3-39.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
system detects that the battery
voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system
starts reducing certain features of
the vehicle that you may be able to
notice. At the point that the features
are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle
is trying to save the charge in the
battery.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
On vehicles with the TirePressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the pressure
in one or more of the vehicle’s tires
needs to be checked. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate which tire needs to
be checked. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a
time. To read the other messages
that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or
the trip odometer reset stem. If a tire
pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading
CRUISE SET TO XXX
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
information.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories
to allow the battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a
chime sounds if the driver door
is not fully closed and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message. See Engine
information on how to reset the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-58
Instrument Panel
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE
This message displays when
the engine coolant becomes
hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant
To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns
off. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Do not increase
the engine speed above normal
idling speed. See Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster
and/or DIC, stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. See Engine
more information.
more information.
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine
page 3-38.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
Operating Mode on page 5-25
for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-59
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
FUEL LEVEL LOW
HEATING WASH (Washer)
FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPES
PENDING
This message displays and a chime
sounds when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine
coolant protection mode. See Engine
information.
This message displays and a
chime sounds if the fuel level is
low. Refuel as soon as possible.
information.
This message displays when
you turn on the heated windshield
washer fluid system. See “Heated
Windshield Washer” under
Windshield Washer on page 3-8
for more information.
HEATED WASH (Washer)
FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message also displays
when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to
accelerate. If this message is
on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance
may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while
this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/
retailer for service as soon as
possible.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays when
you manually turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or
when the system automatically turns
off. See “Heated Windshield Washer”
page 3-8 for more information.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds.
On some models, this message
displays and a chime sounds if
the hood is not fully closed. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the hood
for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when the
outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy road conditions.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-60
Instrument Panel
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is
not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
after the vehicle has been started
and shifted out of P (Park), this
message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has
been turned off. Press the set/reset
button or the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
To turn the URPA system back on,
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the engine oil pressure
is low, severe engine damage
may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop
the vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure
is corrected. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13 for more
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the liftgate is open while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for
the message on the DIC display.
information.
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a
chime sounds if the passenger door
is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
SERVICE AIR BAG
3-61
REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger side rear
door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays if there is
a problem with the airbag system.
Have your dealer/retailer inspect the
system for problems. See Airbag
more information.
This message displays while you are
matching a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless
page 3-50 for more information.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
SERVICE A/C
(Air Conditioning) SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays if there is a problem with
this system. If this message appears,
stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
after 30 seconds and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears
again when you begin driving,
This message displays when
the electronic sensors that control
the air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer
if you notice a drop in heating
and air conditioning efficiency.
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
battery is low. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter.
See “Battery Replacement” under
the AWD system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-62
Instrument Panel
still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system
needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there
is a problem with the StabiliTrak®
system. If this message appears,
try to reset the system. Stop; turn off
the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer/
retailer for service. The vehicle is
safe to drive, however, you do not
have the benefit of StabiliTrak,
so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
On some vehicles, this message
displays if there is a problem
with the battery charging system.
Under certain conditions, the
charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster.
page 3-35. Driving with this problem
could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Have the
electrical system checked as soon
as possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system.
Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
information. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays along with
the brake system warning light if
there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning
appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is
This message displays when a
problem is detected with the power
steering system. When this message
is displayed, you may notice that the
effort required to steer the vehicle
increases or feels heavier, but you
will still be able to steer the vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. The vehicle may or may
not restart so you may want to take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
before turning off the engine.
Immobilizer Operation on page 2-18
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-63
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
SPEED LIMITED TO
XXX MPH (KM/H)
On vehicles with the Tire
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message
is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See your dealer/retailer
on page 4-5 for more information.
This message displays when your
vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph
(128 km/h) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed
variable assist steering system.
Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS),
this message displays if a part on
the TPMS is not working properly.
The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor
information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
STARTING DISABLED
SERVICE THROTTLE
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there
is a problem with the transmission.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
This message displays when your
vehicle’s throttle system is not
functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when
a non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content
theft-deterrent system has detected
a break-in attempt while you
were away from your vehicle.
page 2-16 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-64
Instrument Panel
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
This message may display along
with the check engine light on the
instrument panel cluster if the
On vehicles with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS),
this message displays when the
TPMS is re-learning the tire positions
on your vehicle. The tire positions
must be re-learned after rotating
the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor. See Tire Inspection and
page 5-45 for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
while the transmission fluid is
overheating and the transmission
temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster
and/or DIC, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning
is displayed.
vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened
properly. See Malfunction Indicator
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should
turn this light and message off.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
is turned off. Adjust your driving
information. This message clears
itself after 10 seconds.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool.
This message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-65
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
TURN SIGNAL ON
DIC Vehicle
Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
This message displays and a chime
sounds if a turn signal is left on
for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the
turn signal/multifunction lever to
the off position.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
Your vehicle may have
customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain
features to one preferred setting.
Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the
vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different
drivers.
Entering the Feature
Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place
the vehicle in P (Park).
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
This message displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir as soon as possible.
on page 5-12 for the location of the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-26 for more information.
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
All of the customization options
may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
2. Press the customization button to
enter the feature settings menu.
If the menu is not available,
FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will
display. Before entering the
menu, make sure the vehicle
is in P (Park).
The default settings for the
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-66
Instrument Panel
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Feature Settings Menu Items
This feature allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear.
The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button
until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE
screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once
to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the
DIC messages appear to English.
You can also change the language
by pressing the trip odometer reset
stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons) earlier in this section
for more information.
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to display all DIC
messages in English.
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to
select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock.
information.
FRANCAIS: All messages will
appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-67
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
driver’s door will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
This feature allows you to
select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking
feature. It also allows you to
select which doors and when the
doors will automatically unlock.
more information.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the
driver’s door will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
through the following settings:
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken
out of the ignition.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
ALL IN PARK (default): All of
the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
will automatically lock when the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
through the following settings:
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
OFF: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-68
Instrument Panel
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
HORN & LIGHTS (default):
The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button
on the RKE transmitter, and the horn
will sound when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds
of the previous command.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select
the type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless
on page 2-4 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
will not flash when you press
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select
the type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless
on page 2-4 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on
the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
on the second press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-69
DELAY DOOR LOCK
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
This feature allows you to select
whether or not the locking of the
vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be
delayed. When locking the doors
and liftgate with the power door lock
switch and a door or the liftgate is
open, this feature will delay locking
the doors and liftgate until five
OFF: There will be no delayed
locking of the vehicle’s doors.
through the following settings:
ON (default): The doors will not
lock until five seconds after the last
door or the liftgate is closed.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.
seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal
that the delayed locking feature is
in use. The key must be out of the
ignition for this feature to work.
You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the
lock button on the RKE transmitter
page 2-8 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
30 SECONDS (default): The
exterior lamps will stay on for
30 seconds.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
stay on for one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the
amount of time you want the exterior
lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after
the key is turned from ON/RUN to
LOCK/OFF.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Press the customization button until
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-70
Instrument Panel
APPROACH LIGHTING
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off.
System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low
light periods after unlocking
the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Press the customization button until
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at
the last known setting.
through the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
OFF: The exterior lights will not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until
CHIME VOLUME appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
ON (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will
turn on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-71
PARK TILT MIRRORS
PASSENGER MIRROR: The
passenger’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
If your vehicle has this feature,
it allows you to select whether
or not the outside mirror(s) will
automatically tilt down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
information.
OFF (default): No automatic seat
exit recall will occur.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and
passenger’s outside mirrors will
be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into R (Reverse).
ON: The driver’s seat will move
back when the key is removed from
the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time
after the key is removed from the
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat will stay in
the original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
Press the customization button until
PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
EASY EXIT SEAT
OFF (default): Neither outside
mirror will be tilted down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the automatic easy exit seat
feature. See Memory Seat and
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s
outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until
EASY EXIT SEAT appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-72
Instrument Panel
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
ON: The driver’s seat and outside
mirrors will automatically move
to the stored driving position when
the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key”
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat and
information.
If your vehicle has this feature,
it allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Press the customization button until
MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50
for more information on matching
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE START appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
NO CHANGE: No change will
be made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
OFF (default): No remote memory
seat recall will occur.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will
be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-73
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
DO NOT RESTORE: The
customization features will not be
set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature
Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
•
•
•
The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
The vehicle is no longer in
ON/RUN.
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back
to their factory default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the
feature settings menu.
The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons
are pressed.
Press the customization button
until FEATURE SETTINGS
PRESS V TO EXIT appears in
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to exit the menu.
Press the customization button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
•
•
The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
A 40 second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.
If you do not exit, pressing the
customization button again will return
you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set
to their factory default settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-74
Instrument Panel
For more information, see Defensive
Setting the Clock
To adjust the time and date:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to
become familiar with its features.
Notice: Contact your dealer/
retailer before adding any
equipment.
1. Turn the ignition key to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
then press O, to turn the
radio on.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with the
operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal rules
covering mobile radio and
{ CAUTION
2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year).
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do
not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to
be changed.
telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained
4. To increase the time or date, do
one of the following:
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
•
Press the pushbutton below
the selected label.
To minimize taking your eyes off
the road while driving, do the
following while the vehicle is parked:
page 2-21 for more information.
•
•
•
Press ¨SEEK.
Press \ FWD.
Turn f clockwise.
•
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of
the audio system.
•
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-75
5. To decrease the time or date,
do one of the following:
Radio(s)
•
•
•
Press ©SEEK.
Press s REV.
Turn f counter-clockwise.
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press G and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow
that displays on the radio screen
until the time 12H (hour) and
24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
(month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
Radio with CD
2. Press the pushbutton located
under the desired option.
3. Press G again to apply the
selected default, or let the
screen time out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-76
Instrument Panel
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player
is capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and
the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio Data System (RDS)
feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,
the station name or call letters
display. In rare cases, a radio station
could broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD and DVD
The vehicle may have one of these
radios as its audio system.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system,
it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear
on page 3-114 for more information
on the vehicle’s RSE system.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radios with CD and DVD have a
Bose® Surround Sound System.
Some of its features are explained
later in this section under, “Adjusting
the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-77
To activate SCV:
Playing the Radio
4 (Information): Press to switch the
display between the radio station
frequency and the time. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, press 4
to display the time. For vehicles with
XM, MP3, WMA or RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD,
MP3 or WMA song. If information
is available during XM, CD, MP3
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line.
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
2. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.
For vehicles with a Rear
3. Press the pushbutton under
the AUTO VOLUM (automatic
volume) label on the radio
display.
Entertainment System (RSE),
press and hold for more than
two seconds to turn off the entire
radio and RSE system and to
start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear
seat occupant from operating the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or
remote control.
4. Press the pushbutton under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. Press the
pushbutton located below the
BACK label on the MENU SETUP
display or let the display time out
after approximately 10 seconds.
Each higher setting allows for
more radio volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds.
A lock symbol displays next to
the clock display while the parental
control feature is being used.
The feature remains on until O is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds, or the driver turns the
ignition off and exits the vehicle.
When information is not available,
“NO INFO” is displayed.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): The Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV) feature automatically
adjusts the radio volume to
compensate for road and wind noise
as the vehicle speeds up or slows
down, so that the volume level is
consistent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-78
Instrument Panel
The balance/fade and tone settings
that were previously adjusted,
are stored with the favorite stations.
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM. The selection
displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while
the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
favorite stations using the presets,
favorites button, and steering
wheel controls. See Defensive
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
2. Press FAV to display the page
where to store the station.
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the
previous or to the next station
and stay there.
3. Press and hold one of the
six pushbuttons until a beep
sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV
button). Press to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having
six favorite stations available per
page. Each page of favorites can
contain any combination of AM, FM,
or XM stations.
To scan stations, press and
hold ©or ¨ until a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
The radio only seeks and scans
stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-79
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,
CD, MP3, and WMA features): If
additional information is available for
the current song being played, Auto
Text will automatically page/scroll the
information every five seconds above
the FAV presets on the radio display.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble:
2. Press the pushbutton located
below the FAV 1-6 label.
1. Press f until the tone control
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing
the pushbutton located below
the displayed page numbers.
labels display.
To activate Auto Text:
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Continue pressing f to highlight
the desired label, or press the
pushbutton under the desired
label.
2. Press the pushbutton under
AUTO TXT label on the radio
display.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu
time out, to return to the original
main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels
and to begin the process of
programming favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered
pages.
3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
do one of the following until the
desired levels are obtained.
3. Press the pushbutton under the
ON label on the radio display.
•
Turn f clockwise or
counterclockwise.
If 4 is pressed and the song title
or artist information is longer than
what can be displayed, the extra
information will page every five
seconds when Auto Text is activated.
•
Press \ FWD, or s REV.
If a station’s frequency is weak
or if there is static, decrease
the treble.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-80
Instrument Panel
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB
label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts
to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press f for more than two seconds
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):
To adjust the balance or fade:
until a beep sounds.
Radios with CD and DVD fade
differently depending on the DVD
Media type:
1. Press f until the speaker control
labels display.
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press f for more than
2. Continue pressing f to highlight
the desired label, or press the
pushbutton under the desired
label.
•
With DVD-A 5.1 Surround
media, the left front and right
front speakers fade rearward,
leaving the center front speakers
unaffected until the last fade step,
then all front speakers mute.
two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press to choose
bass and treble equalization settings
designed for different types of music.
The choices are pop, rock, country,
talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass
and treble settings.
3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
do one of the following until the
desired levels are obtained.
•
With DVD-V 5.1 Surround media,
surround sound is maintained
until Step 4 of the Fade control is
reached while fading rearward.
At that point the audio system
output changes to Stereo to
prevent the loss of Center
•
Turn f clockwise or
counterclockwise.
•
Press \ FWD, or s REV.
To quickly adjust balance or fade
to the middle position, press the
pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio
system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
channel output when the full
rearward fade position is reached.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-81
5. To go to the next or previous
XM station within the selected
category, do one of the following:
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station
3. Turn f to display the category to
be removed.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is
used to find XM™ stations when the
radio is in the XM mode. To find XM
channels within a desired category:
4. Press the pushbutton located
under the Remove label until
the category name along with
the word Removed displays.
•
•
Turn f.
Press the buttons below the
right or left arrows on the
display.
1. Press BAND until the XM
frequency displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
•
Press either SEEK arrow.
2. Press CAT to display the
category labels.
Removed categories can be
restored by pressing the pushbutton
under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing
the pushbutton under the Restore
All label.
6. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button
or BAND button to display
the favorites again.
3. Continue pressing CAT until the
desired category name displays.
•
Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the category
Undesired XM categories can
be removed through the setup
menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
Categories cannot be removed or
added while the vehicle is moving
faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
list by pressing s REV or
\ FWD.
1. Press MENU to display the radio
setup menu.
4. Press either of the two buttons
below the desired category label
to immediately tune to the first
XM station associated with that
category.
2. Press the pushbutton located
below the XM CAT label.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-82
Instrument Panel
Radio Messages
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Playing a CD
(Single CD Player)
XM is a satellite radio service that is
based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free
music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will
get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the
vehicle. A service fee is required
to receive the XM service. For
Calibration Error: The audio
system has been calibrated for the
vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for
the vehicle and it must be returned
to your dealer/retailer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls
it in and the CD should begin
playing.
Playing a CD (In Either
the DVD or CD Slot)
Locked: This message displays
when the THEFTLOCK® system
has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls
it in and the CD should begin
playing (loading a disc into the
system, depending on media
type and format ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and
up to 30 seconds for a DVD to
begin playing).
more information, contact XM at
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100
in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected, contact
your dealer/retailer.
Radio Messages for XM Only
page 3-102 later in this section
for further detail.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-83
If the ignition or radio is turned off,
while a CD is in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source. The CD is
controlled by the buttons on the
radio faceplate or by the RSA unit.
page 3-123 for more information.
The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is
the DVD deck and the lower slot
is the CD deck) of the radio are
compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD or DVD player
scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it
could get caught in the CD or DVD
player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description
label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch
the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
When a CD is inserted, the text
label DVD or CD symbol displays
on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-84
Instrument Panel
The use of CD lens cleaners for
CDs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to
the CD and DVD player mechanism.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press
and release to eject the disc that is
currently playing. A CD ejecting from
a radio with CD and DVD, ejects
from the bottom slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The disc can be removed.
If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press ©to go to the
start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds on the CD have played.
Press ¨to go to the next track.
Notice: If a label is added to
a CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
For Radios with CD and DVD,
press ©to go to the start of
automatically pulls back into
the player.
the current track, if more than
five seconds on the CD have played.
If less than five seconds on the CD
have played, the previous track
Z DVD (Eject): Press and
release to eject the disc that is
currently playing in the top slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays.
plays. Press ¨to go to the next
track.
If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
If loading and reading of a disc
cannot be completed, and the
disc fails to eject, press and
hold Z DVD for more than
five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-85
BAND: Press to listen to the
radio when a CD is playing. The CD
remains inside the radio for future
listening.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press
to select between DVD, CD, or
Auxiliary.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound will be heard
at a reduced volume. Release to
resume playing the track. The
•
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays.
For the radio with CD and DVD,
press to listen to the radio when a
CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for
future listening or for viewing
entertainment.
elapsed time of the track displays.
•
When a disc is in either slot,
the DVD/CD text label and a
message showing the track or
chapter number displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound will
be heard at a reduced volume.
Release to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the
track displays.
•
•
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, and a disc is in both
the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
between the two sources and
does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, or Auxiliary.
•
•
When a CD is in the player the
CD icon and a message showing
the disc and/or track number
displays.
RDM (Random): CD tracks can
be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order with the random
setting. To use random, press the
pushbutton positioned under the
RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton
again to turn off random play.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
If a front auxiliary input device
is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available
options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-86
Instrument Panel
If a disc is inserted into top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to only navigate
the CD tracks through the remote
control.
Front seat passengers can listen
to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by
pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to
select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or
rear auxiliary input (if available).
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
The radio has the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3”
in the index.
If a playback device is plugged into
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack
or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
seat passengers are able to listen to
playback from this source through
the vehicle speakers. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”
under, Rear Seat Entertainment
more information.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
information.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single
CD player display CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error
occurs.
Radios with CD and DVD
Audio Output
Radios with a CD and DVD player
may display other messages when
an error occurs:
Only one audio source can be
heard through the speakers at one
time. An audio source is defined
as DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear
Auxiliary Jack.
In some vehicles, depending on
audio options, the rear speakers
can be muted when the RSA
power is turned on. See Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-123
for more information.
Optical Error: The disc was
inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was
inserted with an invalid or unknown
format.
Press O to turn the radio on.
The radio can be heard through
all of the vehicle speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-87
Player Error: There are disc LOAD
or disc EJECT problems.
Playing a DVD
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player can be controlled
by the buttons on the remote control,
the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat
information.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks
on a CD or DVD, to manually tune
a radio station, or to change clock
or date settings, while in the clock
or date setting mode. See the
information given earlier in this
section specific to the radio, CD,
and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the
Clock” in the index, for setting the
clock and date.
•
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
•
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother,
the CD should play.
•
•
•
•
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
The DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region
code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
©SEEK (Previous Track/
Chapter): Press to return to the
start of the current track or chapter.
There could have been a problem
while burning the CD.
The DVD slot of the radio is
compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/
RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
Press © again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
The label could be caught in the
CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly
for any other reason, try a known
good CD.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):
Press to go to the next track
or chapter. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or
the previews.
If an error message displays on
the video screen or the radio, see
“DVD Display Error Messages”
under, Rear Seat Entertainment
“DVD Radio Error Messages” in
this section for more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected, contact
your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer/
retailer when reporting the problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-88
Instrument Panel
If loading and reading of a DVD
cannot be completed, because of an
unknown format, etc., and the disc
fails to eject, press and hold for more
than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to
quickly reverse the DVD at five times
the normal speed. The radio displays
the elapsed time while in fast
reverse. To stop fast reversing,
press again. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the play or pause icon displayed
on the radio system, to toggle
between pausing or restarting
playback of a DVD.
•
•
•
If the forward arrow is showing
on display, the system is in
pause mode.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several icons.
Press the pushbuttons located under
any desired icon during DVD
playback. See the icon list below
for more information.
If the pause icon is showing
on display, the system is in
playback mode.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
to fast forward the DVD. The radio
displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal
speed. To stop fast forwarding,
press again. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
If the DVD screen is off, press the
play button to turn the screen on.
The rear seat passenger can
navigate the DVD-V menus and
controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear
on page 3-114 for more information.
The Video Screen automatically
turns on when the DVD-V is inserted
into the DVD slot.
Some DVDs begin playing after
the previews have finished, although
there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does
not begin playing the movie
Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.
If the DVD is ejected, but not
removed, the player automatically
pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
automatically, press the pushbutton
located under the play/pause icon
displayed on the radio. If the DVD
still does not play, refer to the
on-screen instructions, if available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-89
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the play or pause icon displayed
on the radio system, to toggle
between pausing or restarting
playback of a DVD.
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several icons.
Press the pushbuttons located
under any desired icon during DVD
playback. See the icon list below
for more information.
r (Enter): Press to select the
choices that are highlighted in
any menu.
•
If the forward arrow is showing
on display, the system is in
pause mode.
y (Menu): Press to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
pushbuttons located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the
cursor through the DVD menu.
After making a selection press this
button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
The rear seat operator can
navigate the DVD-A menus and
controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear
on page 3-114 for more information.
The Video Screen does not
automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.
It must be manually turned on by
the rear seat occupant through
the remote control power button.
•
If the pause icon is showing
on display, the system is in
playback mode.
q Group r: Press to cycle
through musical groupings on
the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to
cycle through audio stream
formats located on the DVD-A disc.
The video screen shows the audio
stream changing.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when a DVD is
playing and a menu is active.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-90
Instrument Panel
Inserting a Disc
Stopping and Resuming Playback
The DVD should resume play from
where it last stopped if the disc has
not been ejected and the stop button
has not been pressed twice on the
remote control. If the disc has been
ejected or the stop button has been
pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the
beginning of the disc.
To play a disc, gently insert the
disc, with the label side up, into the
loading slot. The DVD player might
not accept some paper labeled
media. The player starts loading the
disc into the system and shows
“Loading Disc” on the radio display.
At the same time, the radio displays
a softkey menu of option(s). Some
discs automatically play the movie
while others default to the softkey
menu display, which requires the
Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys
to be pressed; either by the softkey
on the radio or by the rear seat
To stop playing a DVD without
turning off the system, do one
of the following:
•
•
Press c on the remote control.
Press the pushbutton located
under the stop or the play/pause
icons displayed on the radio.
Ejecting a Disc
•
If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V,
press the DVD/CD AUX button to
make DVD-V the active source.
Press Z DVD on the radio to eject
the disc. If a disc is ejected from the
radio, but not removed, the radio
reloads the disc after a short period
of time. The disc is stored in the
radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically. If the
movie is reloaded and the RSA
system is sourced to the DVD, the
player begins to play again. If loading
and reading a DVD or CD cannot be
completed, and the disc fails to eject,
To resume DVD playback, do one
of the following:
passenger using the remote control.
•
Press r / j on the remote
It may take up to 30 seconds for a
DVD to begin playing.
control.
•
Press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause icon
displayed on the radio.
press and hold Z DVD for more
than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-91
DVD Radio Error Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume of the
portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the
The radio system has an auxiliary
input jack located on the lower right
side of the faceplate. This is not
an audio output; do not plug a
headphone set into the front auxiliary
input jack. Connect an auxiliary
input device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
Player Error: This message
displays when there are disc load
or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message
displays, if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the
disc is damaged.
volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is
playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might
want to stop it or turn it off.
Disc Region Error: This message
displays, if the disc is not from a
correct region.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
any auxiliary device while the vehicle
is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on
driver distraction.
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays, if no disc is present
when Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX
is pressed on the radio.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
select between CD, or Auxiliary.
•
•
When a CD is in the player
the CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track
number displays.
To use an auxiliary input device,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch)
cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack.
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-92
Instrument Panel
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press
to select between DVD, CD,
or Auxiliary.
•
If a front auxiliary input device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available
options.
Using an MP3
(Radio with CD)
MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
•
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to only navigate
the CD tracks through the remote
control.
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that
were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW
disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the
radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
•
When a disc is in either slot,
the DVD/CD text label and a
message showing the track or
chapter number displays.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
information.
•
If an auxiliary input device is not
connected, and a disc is in both
the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button only cycles
between the two sources and
does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-93
Compressed Audio
or sessions. To play a large
•
•
Create a folder structure that
makes it easy to find songs
while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for
each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
number of files, folders, playlists
or sessions, minimize the length
of the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more
space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
The radio also plays discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files. The radio plays both file formats
in the order in which they were
recorded to the disc.
Avoid subfolders. The system can
support up to eight subfolders
deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum
in order to reduce the complexity
and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
•
Finalize the audio disc before
burning it. Trying to add music to
an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
MP3/WMA Format
Creating an MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
•
Make sure the MP3/WMA files
are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
Change playlists by using S c and
c T folder buttons, the f knob, or
the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded
using no file folders can be played.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
than the maximum of 50 folders,
15 playlists, and a combined total
of 512 folders and files, the player
accesses and navigates up to the
maximum, but all items over the
maximum are not accessible.
•
•
Make sure playlists have a .mp3
or .wpl extension (other file
extensions might not work).
•
•
Do not mix standard audio and
MP3/WMA files on one disc.
Minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist names. Long file,
folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number
of files and folders, or playlists
could cause the player to be
The CD player is able to
read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 15 playlists, and a
combined total of 512 folders
and files.
unable to play up to the maximum
number of files, folders, playlists,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-94
Instrument Panel
Root Directory
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R
or CD-RW is treated as a folder.
If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory displays
as the CD label. All files contained
directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders
or files.
If a root directory or a folder exists
somewhere in the file structure that
contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath
them, the player advances to the
next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files.
The empty folder does not display.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW disc are played in the
following order:
•
Play begins from the first track
in the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play
continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc
contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the
root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on
a CD-R or CD-RW disc that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
If a disc contains both
•
Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play
continues from the first track of
the first folder.
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3/WMA files, a folder
under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio
tracks on the disc.
When the CD-R or CD-RW
When play enters a new folder,
the display does not automatically
show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the
default display. The new track name
displays.
disc contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no
folders, all files are located under
the root folder. The folder down and
up buttons search playlists (Px) first
and then goes to the root folder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-95
File System and Naming
Playing an MP3/WMA
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the pushbutton positioned under
the Folder label to go to the
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the
extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc
partway into the slot label side up.
The player pulls it in, and the
CD-R or CD-RW should begin
playing.
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press
the pushbutton positioned under
the Folder label to go to the
first track in the next folder.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.
Track names longer than
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW
currently playing.
32 characters or four pages are
shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension
of the filename does not display.
s REV (Reverse): Press and
hold this button to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left
SEEK arrow to go to the start of
the current MP3/WMA file, if more
than ten seconds have played.
Press the right SEEK arrow to go
to the next MP3/WMA file. If either
SEEK arrow is held or pressed
multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through
MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however,
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold this button to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/
WMA file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
compressed audio song files.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-96
Instrument Panel
RDM (Random): With the random
setting, MP3/WMA files on the
CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to
in random, rather than sequential
order.
of MP3/WMA files recorded to the
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio can
begin playing while it is scanning the
disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW
begins playing again.
To change from playback by artist
to playback by album, press the
pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push
one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below
the back label to return to the main
music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the
second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins
to play. Once all songs from that
album are played, the player moves
to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and
begins playing MP3/WMA files from
that album.
To play MP3/WMA files from the
CD-R or CD-RW in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
Once the disc has scanned, the
player defaults to playing MP3/WMA
files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files by that artist.
To listen to MP3/WMA files by
another artist, press the pushbutton
located below either arrow button.
The player goes to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until
the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use
the music navigator feature to play
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW in order by artist or album.
Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information.
It could take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number
To exit music navigator mode, press
the pushbutton below the Back label
to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-97
MP3/WMA Format
order to reduce the complexity
and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
Using an MP3 (Radio
with CD and DVD Player)
To create an MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
•
•
Make sure playlists have a .m3u,
.wpl or .pls extension as other file
extensions might not work.
•
Make sure the MP3/WMA files
are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
Compressed Audio or Mixed
Mode Discs
Minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist names. Long file,
folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of
files and folders, or playlists could
cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number
of files, folders, playlists, or
sessions. To play a large number
of files, folders, playlists, or
sessions, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist name.
Long names also take up more
space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
•
•
Do not mix standard audio and
MP3/WMA files on one disc.
The radio also plays discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
files depending on which slot the disc
is loaded into. By default the radio
reads only the uncompressed audio
(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA
files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed
and uncompressed audio format,
the default being the uncompressed
format (.CDA).
The CD player (lower slot) is
able to read and play a maximum
combination of 512 files and
folders. The DVD player (upper
slot) is able to read 255 folders,
15 playlists and 40 sessions.
•
•
Create a folder structure that
makes it easy to find songs
while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for
each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
•
Finalize the audio disc before
burning it. Trying to add music to
an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
Avoid subfolders. The system can
support up to eight subfolders
deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-98
Instrument Panel
Root Directory
No Folder
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or
CD-RW disc is treated as a folder.
If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory is displayed
as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders
or files.
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc
contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder.
The next and previous folder function
does not function on a CD-R or
CD-RW that was recorded without
folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW disc are played in the
following order:
•
Play begins from the first track
in the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play
continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
When the CD-R or CD-RW disc
contains only playlists and
Empty Directory or Folder
•
Play begins from the first track in
the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play
continues from the first track of
the first folder.
compressed audio files, but no
folders, all files are located under
the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes
to the root folder. When the radio
displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
If a root directory or a folder exists
somewhere in the file structure that
contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath
them, the player advances to the
next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files.
The empty folder does not display.
When play enters a new folder,
the display does not automatically
show the new folder name
unless the folder mode has been
chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-99
File System and Naming
Playing an MP3/WMA
(In Either the DVD or CD Slot)
on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to
play where it stopped, if it was the
last selected audio source.
The song name that is displayed is
the song name that is contained in
the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the
extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc
partway into either the top or bottom
slot, label side up. The player pulls it
in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should
begin playing.
As each new track starts to play,
the track number and song title
displays.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release
this button to eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing
in the bottom slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The CD-R or CD-RW disc
can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or
CD-RW disc automatically pulls
back into the player.
Depending on the format of
Track names longer than
the disc, a softkey menu appears
and allows navigation of the disc.
The menu reads left to right as
RDM (Randomize song play order),
a Folder icon with left and right
arrows (to move up or down through
available folders), a PL tag if the disc
has a Playlist available, and a Music
Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is
shown, toggling this key brings up a
Folder softkey only or the menu as
previously described.
32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words
on the last page of text and the
extension of the filename displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however,
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
If loading and reading of a CD cannot
be completed, such as unknown
format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold this button for
more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
with a CD-R or CD-RW disc in the
player it stays in the player. When
the ignition or radio is turned back
compressed audio song files.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-100
Instrument Panel
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release
this button to eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing in
the top slot. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc
is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be
removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW
disc is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW disc
automatically pulls back into the
player. If loading and reading of a
CD cannot be completed, such as
unknown format, etc., and the disc
fails to eject, press and hold this
button for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left
SEEK arrow to go to the start
of the current MP3/WMA file,
if more than five seconds have
played. If less than five seconds
have played, the previous MP3/WMA
file plays. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA
file. If either SEEK arrow is held, or
pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or
forward through the MP3/WMA
files on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and
hold this button to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume
playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold this button to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/
WMA file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the pushbutton positioned under
the Folder label to go to the
RDM (Random): With the random
setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R
or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order.
To play MP3/WMA files from the
CD-R or CD-RW in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
first track in the previous folder.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing.
c T (Next Folder): Press
the pushbutton positioned under
the Folder label to go to the
first track in the next folder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-101
Once the disc has been scanned, the
player defaults to playing MP3/WMA
files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the
arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA
files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either
arrow button. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical
order. Continue pressing either
button until the desired artist is
displayed.
Once all songs from that album are
played, the player moves to the next
album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing
MP3/WMA files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the
music navigator feature to play
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW in order by artist or album.
Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information.
It could take several minutes to scan
the disc depending on the number
of MP3/WMA files recorded to the
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the pushbutton below the Back label
to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to
the radio when a CD or a DVD is
playing. The CD or DVD remains
inside the radio for future listening
or viewing entertainment.
To cancel music navigator while
the player is scanning, press the
pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
To change from playback by artist
to playback by album, press the
pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push
one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below
the back label to return to the main
music navigator screen. Now the
album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs
from the current album begin to play.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press
this button to cycle through DVD,
CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label
and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when
a disc is in either slot. Press this
button again and the system
automatically searches for an
auxiliary input device, such
The radio can begin playing while it is
scanning the disc in the background.
When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
as a portable audio player.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-102
Instrument Panel
If a portable audio player
Channel Off Air: This channel
is not currently in service. Tune
in to another channel.
XM Radio Messages
is not connected, “No Aux Input
Device” displays. If a disc is in both
the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between
the two sources and does not
indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”
under, Rear Seat Entertainment
more information.
XL (Explicit Language Channels):
These channels, or any others, can
be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that
preset button.
30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking
the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
No Artist Info: No artist information
is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top
DVD slot, the rear seat operator can
turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only).
Loading XM: The audio system
is acquiring and processing audio
and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear
shortly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-103
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this
time on this channel. The system
is working properly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the
service.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation
radio system, see the separate
Navigation System manual.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
Bluetooth®
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth capable cell
phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
system can be used while the key is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed to
work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for
more information on compatible
phones.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-104
Instrument Panel
volume knob, during a call,
to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level
remains in memory for later calls.
To prevent missed calls, a minimum
volume level is used if the volume
is turned down too low.
Voice Recognition
Pairing
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
must be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system first and then
connected to the vehicle before it
can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be
made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to
the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
page 3-125 for more information.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for
a voice command. Wait until
the tone and then speak.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
Pairing Information:
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
•
Up to five cell phones can
be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Audio System
•
•
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or to cancel
an operation.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through
the vehicle’s front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio
system. Use the audio system
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system
automatically links with the first
available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-105
4. Start the Pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturers user guide
for information on this process.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
•
•
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system at a time.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth
Pairing should only need to be
completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
Locate the device named
“General Motors” in the list on
the cellular phone and follow the
instructions on the cell phone
to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
ready” followed by a tone.
To link to a different paired phone,
see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all
the paired Bluetooth devices.
If a phone is connected to
the vehicle, the system will
say “Is connected” after the
connected phone.
5. The system prompts for a
name for the phone. Use a name
that best describes the phone.
This name will be used to indicate
which phone is connected. The
system then confirms the name
provided.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth
6. The system responds with
“<Phone name> has been
successfully paired” after the
pairing process is complete.
ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds
with instructions and a four digit
PIN number. The PIN number
will be used in Step 4.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
additional phones to be paired.
ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks
which phone to delete followed
by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-106
Instrument Panel
4. Say the name of the phone to
be deleted. If the phone name is
unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The
system responds with “Would you
like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The
system responds with “Please
wait while I search for other
phones”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone
number to be stored without
entering the digits individually.
•
If another phone is found,
the response will be “<Phone
name> is now connected”.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system
responds with “Store, number
please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number
to be stored at once with no
pauses.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
The system responds with
•
If another phone is not found,
the original phone remains
connected.
“OK, deleting <phone name>”.
Linking to a Different Phone
Storing Name Tags
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty
phone numbers as name tags
that are shared between the
Bluetooth and OnStar systems.
•
If the system recognizes the
number it responds with
“OK, Storing” and repeats
the phone number.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
ready” followed by a tone.
•
If the system is unsure it
recognizes the phone number,
it responds with “Store” and
repeats the number followed
by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say
“Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
•
•
•
Store
Digit Store
Directory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-107
4. After the system stores the
phone number, it responds
with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
4. After the complete number has
been entered, say “Store”.
The system responds with
“Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
The digit store command allows
a phone number to be stored
by entering the digits individually.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to
store <name tag>. Does
that sound OK?”.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system
responds with “Please say the
first digit to store” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored.
The system will repeat back
the digit it heard followed by a
tone. Continue entering digits
until the number to be stored
is complete.
5. Say a name tag for the phone
number. The name tag is
recorded and the system
responds with “About to
store <name tag>. Does
that sound OK?”.
•
If the name tag does not sound
correct, say “No” and repeat
Step 5.
•
If the name tag does not sound
correct, say “No” and repeat
Step 5.
•
If the name tag sounds
•
If the name tag sounds
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After the
number is stored the system
returns to the main menu.
correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After the
number is stored the system
returns to the main menu.
•
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time
to clear the last number.
•
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system,
say “Verify” at any time
and the system will
repeat them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-108
Instrument Panel
Using the Directory Command
Using the Delete Command
Using the Delete All Name Tags
Command
The directory command lists
all of the name tags stored by
the system. To use the directory
command:
The delete command allows specific
name tags to be deleted.
The delete all name tags command
deletes all stored phone book name
tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system
responds with “Delete, please
say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags
command:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system
responds with “Directory”
and then plays back all of the
stored name tags. When the
list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
The system responds with
2. Say “Delete all name tags”.
The system responds with
“You are about to delete all
name tags stored in your
phone directory and your route
destination directory. Are you
sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
“Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Deleting Name Tags
•
If the name tag is correct, say
“Yes” to delete the name tag.
The system responds with
“OK, deleting <name tag>,
returning to the main menu.”
The system uses the following
commands to delete name tags:
•
•
Delete
•
Say “Yes” to delete all
name tags.
Delete all name tags
•
If the name tag is incorrect,
say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK,
let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
•
Say “No” to cancel the function
and return to the main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-109
3. Say the entire number without
pausing.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system
responds with “Digit dial using
<phone name>, please say the
first digit to dial” followed by
a tone.
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the
following commands:
•
If the system recognizes the
number, it responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.
•
•
•
•
Dial
Digit Dial
Call
3. Say the digit to be dialed one
at a time. Following each digit, the
system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
•
If the system does not
recognize the number, it
Re-dial
confirms the numbers followed
by a tone. If the number is
correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing”
and dials the number. If the
number is not correct, say
“No”. The system will ask for
the number to be re-entered.
Using the Dial Command
4. Continue entering digits until the
number to be dialed is complete.
After the whole number has been
entered, say “Dial”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and
dials the number.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Dial using <phone name>.
“Number please” followed by
a tone.
•
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system,
say “Clear” at any time to
clear the last number.
Using the Digit Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
•
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-110
Instrument Panel
Using the Call Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Receiving a Call
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds
with “Call using <phone name>.
Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a
ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Using the Re-dial Command
•
Press b g and begin speaking
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
to answer the call.
•
Press c x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”.
The system responds with
“Re-dial using <phone name>”
and dials the last number
called from the connected
Bluetooth phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person
to call.
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
•
If the system clearly
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials
the number.
•
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call is
active. The original call is placed
on hold.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
•
If the system is unsure it
recognizes the right name
tag, it confirms the name tag
followed by a tone. If the name
tag is correct, say “Yes”.
•
•
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
To ignore the incoming call,
continue with the original call
with no action.
The system responds with
“OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
•
Press c x to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-111
To Transfer Audio to the
Cell Phone
Three-Way Calling
Muting a Call
Three-Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that
the person on the other end of
the call cannot hear them.
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g.
The system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
responds with “Transferring call”
and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system
responds with “Three-way call,
please say dial or call”.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Call muted”.
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
To Transfer Audio to the
In-Vehicle Bluetooth System
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
key is turned to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all the callers
together.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.
The system responds with
“Resuming call”.
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
Transferring a Call
During a call with the audio on the
Audio can be transferred between
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system
and the cell phone.
cell phone, press b g for more
than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-112
Instrument Panel
3. Say the number to send.
Voice Pass-Thru
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
•
If the system clearly
recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending
Number” and the dial tones
are sent and the call
continues.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
This feature can be used to verbally
access contacts stored in the cell
phone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
send numbers and numbers stored
as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven
phone system. Account numbers can
be programmed into the phonebook
for retrieval during menu driven calls.
•
If the system is not sure it
recognized the number
properly, it responds “Dial
Number, Please say yes or
no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with
“OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the
call continues.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system
responds with “Bluetooth
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds
with “Say a number to send
tones” followed by a tone.
ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system
responds with “OK, accessing
<phone name>”.
•
The cell phone’s normal
prompt messages will go
through its cycle according
to the phone’s operating
instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-113
Sending a Stored Name Tag
During a Call
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out
of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system,
it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags
in the phonebook and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
above sections on Deleting a Paired
Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. Press b g. The system
responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
2. Say “Send name tag.”
The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones”
followed by a tone.
This device complies with RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two
conditions:
3. Say the name tag to send.
Other Information
•
If the system clearly
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by General Motors is under
license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their
respective owners.
recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending
<name tag>” and the dial
tones are sent and the
call continues.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
•
If the system is not sure it
recognized the name tag
properly, it responds “Dial
<name tag>, Please say yes
or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say
“Yes”. The system responds
with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are
sent and the call continues.
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-114
Instrument Panel
In severe or extreme weather
conditions the RSE system might
or might not work until the
Headphones
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD
player is part of the front radio.
The RSE system includes a radio
with a DVD player, a video display
screen, audio/video jacks, two
wireless headphones, and a remote
for more information on the vehicle’s
audio/DVD system.
temperature is within the operating
range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)
or below 140°F (60°C). If the
temperature of the vehicle is outside
of this range, heat or cool the vehicle
until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have
a Parental Control feature,
The RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones that are
depending on the radio. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold
the radio power button for more
than two seconds to stop all system
features such as: radio, video
screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While
Parental Control is on, Q displays.
When the radio is turned back on,
Parental Control is unlocked.
Before Driving
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
is dedicated to the video screen,
while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections. These headphones are
used to listen to media such as CDs,
DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio,
any auxiliary source connected to
A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack,
if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE is designed for rear
seat passengers only. The driver
cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try
to do so.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-115
The wireless headphones have an
On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch,
and a volume control. Switch the
headphones to Off when not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located
at the rear of the RSE overhead
console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA
are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for
more than three minutes. Moving too
far forward or stepping out of the
vehicle, can cause the headphones
to lose the audio signal.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage
the headphones and repairs will
not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool,
dry place.
Push the power button to turn
on the headphones. An indicator
light located on the headphones
comes on. If the light does not
come on, the batteries might need
to be replaced. Intermittent sound
or static on the headphones can also
be an indication of weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information.
If the foam ear pads attached to
the headphones become worn or
damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set.
See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
For optimal audio performance,
the headphones must be worn
correctly. Headphones should be
worn with the headband over the top
of the head for best audio reception.
The symbol L (Left) appears on the
upper left side, above the ear pad
and should be positioned on the left
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the
ear pad and should be positioned
on the right ear.
The headphones automatically turn
off after four hours of continuous use.
Headphones should be stored in
the front floor console and not in the
front seat back pocket. Headphone
damage can occur when the second
row seats are folded forward.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume
control located on the right side.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-116
Instrument Panel
Battery Replacement
The A/V jacks are color coded to
match typical home entertainment
system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input.
The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is
for the right audio input.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries on the
headphones:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the
battery door located on the
left side of the headphones.
Slide the battery door open.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of
the battery compartment.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system, connect an external
auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power
on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX
(auxiliary) button on the remote
control, switches the video screen
from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected
auxiliary device by sourcing to
for more information.
3. Replace the battery door and
tighten the door screw.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear
of the floor console, allow audio
or video signals to be connected
from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to
the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not supplied) might be
required to connect the auxiliary
device to the A/V jacks. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for
proper usage.
If the headphones are to be stored
for a long period of time, remove
the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the
overhead console. When the video
screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
3-117
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
The RSE system always transmits
the audio signal to the wireless
headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The screen display mode (normal,
full, and zoom), screen brightness,
and setup menu language can
be changed from the on screen
setup menu by using the remote
control. To change a setting:
The DVD player is capable of
outputting audio to the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA
system, if the vehicle has this
feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on
the RSA system. See Rear Seat
more information.
To use the video screen:
1. Push the release button located
on the overhead console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
position.
1. Press z.
2. Use n, q, p, o and r to
If a DVD is playing and the screen
is raised to its locked position, the
screen remains on; this is normal,
and the DVD continues to play
through the previous audio source.
Press P on the remote control or
eject the disc to turn off the screen.
navigate and use the setup menu.
3. Press z again to remove the
setup menu from the screen.
When a device is connected to the
A/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliary
input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers
are able to hear audio from the
auxiliary device through the wireless
or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to
playback from this device through
the vehicle speakers by selecting
AUX as the source on the radio.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following sources:
The infrared receivers for the
wireless headphones and the
remote control are located at the
rear of the overhead console.
•
•
•
Wireless Headphones
Vehicle Speakers
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage
may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this
section for more information.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks
on the rear seat audio system,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-118
Instrument Panel
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
slot, the remote control O button can
be used to turn on the video screen
display and start the disc. The radio
can also turn on the video screen
for more information.
To use the remote control, aim it
at the transmitter window at the rear
of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight
or very bright light could affect the
ability of the RSE transmitter to
receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does
not seem to be working, the batteries
might need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of
sight could also affect the function of
the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and
the repairs will not be covered by
the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the remote control stored
in a cool, dry place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-119
When the DVD is playing, depending
on the radio, play may be slowed
down by pressing s then [.
The DVD continues playing in a
slow play mode. Depending on the
radio, perform reverse slow play by
O (Power): Press to turn the video
r (Enter): Press to select
the choice that is highlighted in
any menu.
screen on and off.
P (Illumination): Press to turn
the remote control backlight on.
The backlight automatically times out
after seven to ten seconds if no other
button is pressed while the backlight
is on.
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust
the brightness, screen display mode
(normal, full, or zoom), and display
the language menu.
pressing s then r. To cancel
slow play mode, press s again.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when the display
menu or a DVD menu is active.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press
to return to the start of the current
track or chapter. Press again to
go to the previous track or chapter.
This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
v (Title): Press to return the DVD
to the main menu of the DVD. This
function could vary for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
navigation arrows to move the cursor
around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when
using a DVD.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a
DVD. Press twice to return to
the beginning of the DVD.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press
to go to the beginning of the next
chapter or track. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
s (Play/Pause): Press to start
playing a DVD. Press while a DVD
is playing to pause it. Press again
to continue playing the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-120
Instrument Panel
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal remote
control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal
remote control uses a Toshiba®
code set.
r (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast
reversing a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast reversing a DVD audio
or CD, release r. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn
ON/OFF subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a DVD
is playing. The format and content
of this function vary for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
switch the system between the DVD
player and an auxiliary source.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
d (Camera): Press to change
camera angles on DVDs that have
this feature when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this
function vary for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD video, press s.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release [. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
1. Slide the rear cover back, on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of
the battery compartment.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numeric keypad provides
the capability of direct chapter
or track number selection.
3. Replace the battery cover.
e (Audio): Press to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this
function vary for each disc.
\ (Clear): Press within
three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all
numerical inputs.
If the remote control is to be stored
for a long period of time, remove
the batteries and keep them in
a cool, dry place.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press
to select chapter or track numbers
greater than nine. Press this
button before entering the number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-121
Problem
Recommended Action
No power.
The ignition might not be turned
ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings
There are black borders on the top in the setup menu by pressing the
and bottom or on both sides or it
looks stretched out.
display menu button on the remote
control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input
or scrolls.
connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no
obstruction between the remote
control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure
they are not dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push
If the stop button was pressed
Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes
where I left off and sometimes at
the beginning.
playing where the DVD was stopped.
If the stop button was pressed two
times the DVD player begins to play
from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running but
there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen
is in the auxiliary source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections
at both devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-122
Instrument Panel
DVD Distortion
Problem
Recommended Action
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
or walkie talkies.
Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions,
audio cuts out or buzzes.
low batteries, reception range,
and interference from cellular
telephone towers or by using a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are
on correctly using the L (left) and
R (right) on the headphones.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one
of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or the
headphones.
See your dealer/retailer for
assistance.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
The DVD is playing, but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is
sourced to the DVD player.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Console
Disc Region Error: This message
displays if the disc is not from a
correct region.
DVD Display Error Messages
When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water.
The DVD display error message
depends on which radio the vehicle
has. The video screen might
display one of the following:
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays if no disc is present
when the Z EJECT button
is pressed on the radio.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message
displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the
disc is damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-123
rear seat passengers can control
a CD and listen to it through the
headphones, while the driver listens
to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear
speakers when the RSA audio
is active through the headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
directly touching or cleaning the
screen, as damage could result.
To listen to an iPod or portable
audio device through the RSA,
attach the iPod or portable audio
device to the front auxiliary input
(if available), located on the
front audio system. Turn the iPod
on, then choose the front auxiliary
input with the RSA SRCE button.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
For vehicles with Rear Seat
The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The front
audio system displays X when
the RSA is on, and disappears
from the display when it is off.
Audio (RSA), rear seat passengers
can listen to and control any of the
music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
or other auxiliary sources. The rear
seat passengers can only control
the music sources the front seat
passengers are not listening to
(except on some radios where dual
control is allowed). For example,
Audio can be heard through wired
headphones (not included) plugged
into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can
also be heard on Channel 2 of
the wireless headphones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-124
Instrument Panel
While listening to a disc, press ¨to
go to the next track or chapter on
the disc. Press ©to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter
(if more than ten seconds have
played). This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press ©or ¨ to perform
a cursor up or down on the menu.
Hold ©or ¨ to perform a cursor
left or right on the menu.
© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the
previous or to the next station and
stay there. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA
on or off.
PROG (Program): Press to go
to the next preset radio station or
channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
Volume: Turn to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired
headphones. The left knob controls
the left headphones and the right
knob controls the right headphones.
Press and hold ©or ¨ until
the display flashes to tune to an
individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons
have not been pushed for more
than two seconds. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the
radio.
SRCE (Source): Press to select
between the radio (AM/FM/XM™),
CD, and if the vehicle has these
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is
playing, press PROG to go to the
beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-125
When a disc is playing in the CD or
DVD changer, press PROG to select
the next disc, if multiple discs are
loaded. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls
w (Next): Press to go to the next
radio station stored as a favorite, or
the next track if a CD/DVD is
playing.
c x (Previous/End): Press to
go to the previous radio station
stored as a favorite, the next track if
a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press PROG to perform
the ENTER menu function.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press
to silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or
Bluetooth systems, press and
hold for longer than two seconds
to interact with those systems.
this manual for more information.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle’s
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it
is stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
controls could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-126
Instrument Panel
SRCE (Source): Press to switch
between the radio (AM, FM, XM),
CD, and for vehicles with, DVD,
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
AM
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the
next radio station while in AM, FM,
or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next
track or chapter while sourced to
the CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨if
multiple discs are loaded to go to
the next disc while sourced to a CD
player.
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
For vehicles with the navigation
system, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
Radio Reception
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the radio
volume.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell
phone chargers, vehicle
convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or
static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about
10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in
electronic circuit that automatically
works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially
around tall buildings or hills, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
3-127
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Multi-Band Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service
The multi-band antenna is located
on the roof of the vehicle. This type
of antenna is used with the AM/FM
radio, as well as OnStar® and the
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
System, if the vehicle has these
features. Keep this antenna clear
of snow and ice build up for clear
radio reception. If the vehicle has
a sunroof, the performance of the
radio system may be affected if the
sunroof is open. Loading items onto
the roof of the vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the radio
system and, if the vehicle has this
feature, OnStar®. Make sure the
multi-band antenna is not obstructed.
gives digital radio reception from
coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just
as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle’s radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on.
This interference causes an
increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn
it off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-128
Instrument Panel
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-1
Your Driving, the
Road, and the Vehicle
Driving Your
Vehicle
Driving for Better Fuel
.....................4-15 Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
•
•
•
•
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
Towing
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt
stops.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control, if equipped.
•
•
Always follow posted speed limits
or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Driving Your Vehicle
•
•
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION
Replace the vehicle’s tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire’s sidewall
near the size.
{ CAUTION
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
• Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
•
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The
first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See
on page 1-14.
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
Braking
page 3-36.
4-3
Police records show that
passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these deaths
are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years,
more than 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol,
with about 250,000 people injured.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding
to push the brake pedal is
perception time. Actually doing
it is reaction time.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help
to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
page 4-5.
Average reaction time is about
three-fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more
with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part. So
do alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph
(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to
drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can
make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone
who has been drinking — driver or
and others is important.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Driving Your Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of
the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when
the brake is applied. Once the power
assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect vehicle
performance. See Accessories and
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some
people drive in spurts — heavy
Let us say the road is wet and you
are driving safely. Suddenly, an
animal jumps out in front of you. You
slam on the brakes and continue
braking. Here is what happens
with ABS:
acceleration followed by heavy
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
braking — rather than keeping pace
with traffic. This is a mistake. The
brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will
wear out much faster with a lot of
heavy braking. Keeping pace with
the traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
A computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work
the brakes at each wheel.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops,
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-5
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
situation dictates The Brake Assist
feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released
or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot
up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you
get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough
time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even with ABS.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has the StabiliTrak
system which combines antilock
brake, traction and stability control
systems and helps the driver
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to
quickly stop or slow down the
vehicle. The stability system
hydraulic brake control module
increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the
ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement
during this time is normal and the
driver should continue to apply
the brake pedal as the driving
maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
When you first start the vehicle and
begin to drive away, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems.
The system may be heard or
felt while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and
let antilock work. The antilock pump
or motor operating might be
heard and the brake pedal might be
felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take
approximately two miles (3.2 km) of
driving before the system initializes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Driving Your Vehicle
If the system fails to turn on or
activate, the StabiliTrak light along
with one of the following messages
will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC):
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working; this is normal.
control when traction control is off,
but will not be able to use the engine
speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these
conditions are observed, turn the
vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and
then turn it back on again to reset the
system. If any of these messages still
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages,
on page 3-44.
When the traction control system
has been turned off, system noises
may be heard and felt as a result
of the brake-traction control working.
The traction control disable button is
located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the
vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the
vehicle to attempt to free it. It may
also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme
off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your
The traction control part of
StabiliTrak can be turned off by
pressing and releasing the traction
control disable button.
Traction control can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the traction
control disable button if not
automatically shut off for any other
reason.
When the traction control system is
turned off, the StabiliTrak light
and the appropriate traction control
off message will be displayed on
the DIC to warn the driver. The
vehicle will still have brake-traction
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster when the
system is both on and activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-7
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
is allowed to spin excessively
while the StabiliTrak, ABS and
brake warning lights and any
relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could
be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
If cruise control is being used when
the system activates, the StabiliTrak
light will flash and cruise control
will automatically disengage. Cruise
control may be reengaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine
speed management) and by applying
brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
StabiliTrak may also turn off
automatically if it determines that a
problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after
restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
The traction control system is
enabled automatically when the
vehicle is started. It will activate and
the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If traction control is
turned off, only the brake-traction
control portion of traction control
will work. The engine speed
The traction control system may
activate on dry or rough roads
or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, a
reduction in acceleration may be
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced
automatically and the driven
wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control
to activate constantly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Driving Your Vehicle
Steering Tips
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System
If the vehicle has this feature, engine
power is sent to all four wheels when
extra traction is needed. This is like
four-wheel drive, but there is no
separate lever or switch to engage or
disengage the axle. It is fully
Steering
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
system is not functioning, the vehicle
can be steered but it will take
more effort.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the curve
is banked, and vehicle speed. While
in a curve, speed is the one factor
that can be controlled.
automatic, and adjusts itself as
needed for road conditions.
Variable Effort Steering
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve,
while the front wheels are straight.
If the vehicle has this steering
system, the system continuously
adjusts the effort felt when steering
at all vehicle speeds. It provides
ease when parking, yet a firm, solid
feel at highway speeds.
When using a compact spare tire on
the AWD equipped vehicle, the AWD
system automatically detects the
presence of the compact spare and
the AWD is disabled. To restore the
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the AWD system,
replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-83
for more information.
Try to adjust the speed so you
can drive through the curve.
Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until out
of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a
car suddenly pulls out from nowhere,
or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of
you. These problems can be avoided
by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot stop in
time because there is no room.
That is the time for evasive
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just
as quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
action — steering around the
problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First, apply
page 4-3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement.
depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear
safety belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Driving Your Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle’s three control
•
•
Wait your turn to pass a slow
vehicle.
3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the steering
or cornering skid, too much speed or
steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in
the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
When you are being passed, ease
to the right.
Loss of Control
Passing
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when
the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do
not have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what
the driver has asked.
Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane road can be dangerous. To
reduce the risk of danger while
passing:
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough, the vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
•
Look down the road, to the sides,
and to crossroads for situations
that might affect a successful
pass. If in doubt, wait.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
•
Watch for traffic signs,
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
pavement markings, and lines
that could indicate a turn or an
intersection. Never cross a solid
or double-solid line on your side of
the lane.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable care
suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
•
Do not get too close to the vehicle
you want to pass. Doing so can
reduce your visibility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-11
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle
speed by shifting to a lower gear.
Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You might not
realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
•
•
Avoid staring directly into
approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than
day driving because some drivers
are likely to be impaired — by alcohol
or drugs, with night vision problems,
or by fatigue.
Keep the windshield and all glass
on your vehicle clean — inside
and out.
•
Keep your eyes moving,
especially during turns or curves.
Night driving tips include:
No one can see as well at night as
in the daytime. But, as we get
older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need
at least twice as much light to see
the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
•
•
•
Drive defensively.
Do not drink and drive.
Reduce headlamp glare by
adjusting the inside rearview
mirror.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake
System (ABS) helps avoid only the
braking skid.
•
Slow down and keep more space
between you and other vehicles
because headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Driving Your Vehicle
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
CAUTION (Continued)
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle’s
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
4-13
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Before Leaving on a
Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, consider having it serviced
by your dealer/retailer before
departing.
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
Other driving tips include:
Things to check on your own
include:
•
•
•
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep interior temperature cool.
•
•
•
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
•
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
Have good tires with proper tread
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
•
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Turn off cruise control.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:
All levels checked?
•
•
Lamps: Do they all work and are
lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires
inflated to recommended
pressure?
•
Weather and Maps: Safe to
travel? Have up-to-date maps?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Driving Your Vehicle
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
You would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
•
Keep the vehicle serviced
and in good shape.
•
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
•
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
•
Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
{ CAUTION
•
•
Top of hills: Be alert — something
could be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing
down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-15
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can occur
on otherwise clear roads in shaded
areas. The surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid
sudden steering maneuvers and
braking while on ice.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
surface under the tires even more.
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 32°F
(0°C) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
page 4-5 improves the ability to
accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, turn
off the traction control part of
the StabiliTrak® System to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently
so traction is not lost. Accelerating
too quickly causes the wheels
to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even
less traction.
on page 4-4 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Driving Your Vehicle
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION (Continued)
CAUTION (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
To get help and keep everyone
in the vehicle safe:
• Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in
the Index.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from
around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
• Open a window about two
inches (5 cm) on the side of
the vehicle that is away from
the wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
•
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
{ CAUTION
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may cause
exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill
you. You cannot see it or smell it,
so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-17
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm,
but be careful.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
{ CAUTION
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin
at high speed, they can explode,
and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment
fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid going above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat
this until help arrives but only when
you feel really uncomfortable
If the vehicle has a traction system, it
can often help to free a stuck vehicle.
Refer to the vehicle’s traction system
in the Index. If stuck too severely for
the traction system to free the
vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
from the cold. Moving about to keep
warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine
runs faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
restart the vehicle and to signal for
help with the headlamps. Do
this as little as possible to save fuel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
Driving Your Vehicle
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
{ CAUTION
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. This weight is called
the vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around
the front wheels. Turn off any
traction or stability system. Shift
back and forth between R (Reverse)
and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. To
prevent transmission wear, wait until
the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while shifting, and
press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in
gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on your vehicle show
how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed
out. If the vehicle does need to
be towed out, see Towing Your
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-19
Tire and Loading Information
Label
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
The tire and loading information
label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
The Tire and Loading Information
label also shows the size of the
original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire
inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
page 5-45.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Example Label
There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Certification/Tire label. It tells
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear
axle. See “Certification/Tire
Label” later in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With
the driver’s door open, you
will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker).
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Driving Your Vehicle
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how
this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load
Example 1
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs
(136 kg).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 700 lbs
(317 kg).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs
(340 kg).
capacity for your vehicle.
page 4-26 for important
information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-21
The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
The label shows the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear
axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to
go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out
your load equally on both sides
of the centerline.
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Label Example
1,000 lbs (453 kg).
A vehicle specific Certification/
Tire label is attached to the
rear edge of the driver’s door.
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg).
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and
loading information label for
specific information about your
vehicle’s capacity weight
and seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Driving Your Vehicle
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
will go as fast as the vehicle
goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled
vehicle should be towed with all four
wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if the disabled vehicle
must be towed. See Roadside
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Things you put inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo
area of your vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”
following.
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing
the vehicle with all four wheels on the
• Do not leave an unsecured
Notice: Overloading your
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not
overload your vehicle.
child restraint in your
vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it
whenever you can.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else, they
• Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-23
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, the
vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication of
transmission components. Re-install
the fuse to start the vehicle.
Dinghy Towing
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
To tow the vehicle from the front
with all four wheels on the ground:
•
•
•
What is the towing capacity of the
towing vehicle? Be sure to read
the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1. Position the vehicle to tow
and then secure it to the towing
vehicle.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)
and turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it
can be dinghy towed from the
front. These vehicles may also be
towed by putting the front wheels on
a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later
in this section.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice
and equipment recommendations.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
5. Shift the transmission to
N (Neutral).
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it can
be dinghy towed from the front.
These vehicles can also be towed by
placing them on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the ground.
These vehicles cannot be towed
using a dolly.
•
Is the vehicle ready to be towed?
Just as preparing the vehicle for a
long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before
page 4-13.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Driving Your Vehicle
6. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is being
towed, remove the 50 amp
BATT1 fuse from the underhood
fuse block and store in a safe
location. See Underhood
Once the destination is reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse
to the underhood fuse block.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park), turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key from the ignition.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
without performing each of
the steps listed under “Dinghy
Towing,” the automatic
transmission could be damaged.
Be sure to follow all steps of
the dinghy towing procedure prior
to and after towing the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
towing vehicle.
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle
with the front drive wheels on the
ground if one of the front tires
is a compact spare tire. Towing
with two different tire sizes on the
front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be
towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four
wheels off of the ground or dinghy
towed from the front.
Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h)
is exceeded while towing
the vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)
while towing the vehicle.
transmission.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-25
5. Remove the key from the
ignition.
Dolly Towing
(Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles Only)
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Towing the Vehicle From
the Rear
Notice: Towing the vehicle from
the rear could damage it. Also,
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle
from the front with two wheels
on the ground:
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed
for towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Driving Your Vehicle
To identify the trailering capacity of
the vehicle, read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transmission, rear
axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the
drag of the added weight. The
engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating
extra heat. What’s more, the trailer
adds considerably to wind
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION
Trailering is different than just
driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly. For
example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
Pulling A Trailer
The following information has many
time-tested, important trailering
tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for the safety of the
driver and the passengers. So
please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
Here are some important points:
•
There are many different
laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with
trailering. Make sure the rig will
be legal, not only where you
live but also where you will be
driving. A good source for
this information can be state or
provincial police.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-27
It can depend on any special
•
•
Consider using a sway control.
See “Hitches” later in this
section.
•
The vehicle is designed
equipment on the vehicle, and the
amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
primarily as a passenger and load
carrying vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the vehicle will require
more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 500 miles (800 km) the
new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the
required trailering equipment. The
weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Three important considerations have
to do with weight:
•
Then, during the first 500 miles
(800 km) that a trailer is towed, do
not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
•
•
•
The weight of the trailer.
The weight of the trailer tongue.
And the weight on the
vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
•
•
Obey speed limit restrictions
when towing a trailer.
It depends on how the rig is
used. For example, speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature
and how much the vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important.
The vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts too
often under heavy loads and/or
hilly conditions. See “Tow/Haul
Mode” later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
Driving Your Vehicle
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Maximum Trailer Weight
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
*GCWR
Front-Wheel Drive
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package
All-Wheel Drive
All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our
trailering information or advice, or
write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance
information.
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight the vehicle can carry,
which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. If towing
a trailer, the tongue load must be
added to the GVW because
the vehicle will be carrying that
weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-18 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
If there are a lot of options,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-29
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
(1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer
rating should be:
Trailering may also be limited by the
vehicle’s ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the
RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce the trailering
capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs
(386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the
effect on the rear axle is greater than
just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg)
X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg)
brings the total to 3,975 lbs
If a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch is being
used, the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10-15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs
(1 270 kg) at the front axle and
2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.
It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well.
The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
Driving Your Vehicle
If the vehicle has many options and
there is a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the
vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle
weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the
rear axle weight. The vehicle
now weighs:
Because the rear axle now weighs
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s
Tires
(408 kg) can be put on the rear axle
without exceeding RGAWR. The
effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing
the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves
only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight that can be handled. Since
tongue weight is usually at least
10 percent of total loaded trailer
weight, expect that the largest trailer
the vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are
inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Certification/Tire label.
page 4-18. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds,
large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why
the right hitch is needed. Here are
some rules to follow:
It is important that the vehicle
does not exceed any of its
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Weight. The only way to be sure
it is not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh the vehicle and
trailer.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg) and you might think
700 additional pounds (318 kg)
should be subtracted from the
trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg).
You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to
less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid
exceeding GVWR. But the effect on
the rear axle must still be considered.
•
The rear bumper on the vehicle is
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-31
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
parts and attachments, safety
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments.
If the trailer has electric brakes,
start the vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks
the electrical connection at the
same time.
•
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, then be sure to seal the holes
later when the hitch is removed.
If the holes are not sealed, dirt,
water, and deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from the exhaust
can get into the vehicle. See
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more
than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needs
to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted
and maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not try to tap into
the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.
Safety Chains
During the trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lamps and any
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
trailer brakes are still working.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Get to
know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted
with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains
may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig
can turn. Never allow safety chains
to drag on the ground.
Stay at least twice as far behind
the vehicle ahead as you would
when driving the vehicle without a
trailer. This can help to avoid
situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-32
Driving Your Vehicle
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so
the trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
Passing
Driving on Grades
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because
the rig is longer, it is necessary to
go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Because of the added load of the
trailer, the vehicle’s engine may
overheat on hot days, when going
up a long or steep grade with a
trailer. If the engine coolant
temperature gage indicates
overheating, turn off the air
conditioning to reduce engine load,
pull off the road and stop in a
safe spot. Let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off.
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
Backing Up
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes or stopping.
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to
the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may
think other drivers are seeing the
signal when they are not. It is
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long or
steep downgrade. If the transmission
is not shifted down, the brakes might
have to be used so much that
they would get hot and no longer
work well.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause
the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could
be damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
important to check occasionally to be
sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce the vehicle speed
to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to
reduce the possibility of the engine
and the transmission overheating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-33
earlier in this section. Tow/Haul is
most useful under the following
driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load. The purpose
of the Tow/Haul mode is to:
•
•
•
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load through
rolling terrain.
•
Reduce the frequency and
improve the predictability of
transmission shifts when pulling
a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load.
Press this button located on the
console to turn on and turn off the
Tow/Haul mode.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in stop and
go traffic.
The Tow/Haul light on the
instrument panel will come on to
indicate that Tow/Haul mode
has been selected.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in busy
parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is
desired.
•
•
•
Provide the same solid shift feel
when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
Tow/Haul may be turned off by
pressing the button again, at which
time the indicator light on the
instrument panel will turn off.
The vehicle will automatically turn
off Tow/Haul every time it is started.
Improve control of vehicle speed
while requiring less throttle pedal
activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
when lightly loaded or with no trailer
at all will not cause damage.
However, there is no benefit to the
selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection
when unloaded may result in
unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced
fuel economy. Tow/Haul is
recommended only when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Increase the charging system
voltage to assist in recharging
a battery installed in a trailer.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most
effective when the vehicle and
trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle’s
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR). See Weight of the Trailer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-34
Driving Your Vehicle
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into P (Park).
Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil,
axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good
idea to inspect these before and
during the trip.
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
Leaving After Parking on
a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
•
•
•
start the engine,
Trailer Wiring Harness
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
The vehicle is equipped with the
following wiring harness for towing
a trailer.
If parking the rig on a hill:
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet.
Turn the wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic
if facing uphill.
Basic Trailer Wiring
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
The trailer wiring harness, with a
seven-pin connector, is located
at the rear of the vehicle and is
tied to the vehicle’s frame.
The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your
dealer/retailer.
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer.
page 6-3 for more information.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Your Vehicle
4-35
The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is
being charged, press the Tow/Haul
mode switch located on the
center console near the climate
controls. This will boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly
charge the battery. If the trailer is
too light for Tow/Haul mode, turn on
the headlamps (Non-HID only) as
a second way to boost the
•
•
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
Black: Ground
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
The electric trailer brake controller
should be installed by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service
center.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal
•
•
•
•
•
Brown: Taillamps
Black: Ground
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red/Black: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
vehicle system and charge the
battery.
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23.
Electric Trailer Brake Control
Wiring Provisions
*The fuse for this circuit is installed
in the underhood electrical center,
but the wires are not connected.
They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
service center.
These wiring provisions for an
electric trailer brake controller are
included with the vehicle as
part of the trailer wiring package.
The instrument panel contains blunt
cut wires behind the steering
column for the electric trailer brake
controller. The harness contains
the following wires:
If the back-up lamp circuit is not
functional, contact your
dealer/retailer.
•
•
•
Red/Black: Power Supply
White: Brake Switch Signal
Gray: Illumination
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-36
Driving Your Vehicle
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification
Appearance Care
Electrical System
Capacities and Specifications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-3
Your GM dealer/retailer can
accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you
go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask
for GM Accessories, you will know
that GM-trained and supported
Accessories and
Modifications
Service
For service and parts needs,
visit your dealer/retailer. You will
receive genuine Saturn parts
and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories are added to the vehicle,
they can affect vehicle performance
and safety, including such things
as airbags, braking, stability, ride
and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. Some of these accessories
could even cause malfunction or
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of
these marks.
Also, see Adding Equipment to
page 1-60.
California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle),
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with
other systems on the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Service and Appearance Care
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Doing Your Own
Service Work
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
{ CAUTION
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience, the
proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing Your
page 1-60.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed. See
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-5
87 octane or higher as soon as
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of the Vehicle
Fuel
possible. If you are using gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, the engine
needs service.
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Things added to the outside of the
vehicle can affect the airflow
around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy
and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
the outside of the vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher.
If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking
noise when you drive, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
page 5-6 for additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Service and Appearance Care
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change, can
help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors.
California Fuel
Additives
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control
system performance might be
affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp could turn on and the vehicle
might fail a smog-check test. See
page 3-39. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now required
to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing the emission
control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to
add anything to the fuel. However,
some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Also, your dealer/retailer has
additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related
problems.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-7
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might
be available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn
on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States
or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused
by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask
an auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under
the vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Service and Appearance Care
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on
the driver side of the vehicle.
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
{ CAUTION
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are
near fuel or refueling the vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly. If
you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if
the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the
fuel cap slowly and wait for any
hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
cap has a spring in it; if the cap
is released too soon, it will spring
back to the right.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-9
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top
off or overfill the tank and wait a few
seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible. See Washing Your
If the vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
displays if the fuel cap is not
properly installed.
Notice: If you need a new fuel
cap, be sure to get the right type.
Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type,
it might not fit properly. This can
cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and can damage the
fuel tank and emissions system.
on page 3-39.
{ CAUTION
When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Service and Appearance Care
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
Checking Things
Under the Hood
CAUTION (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and the
vehicle damaged if this occurs. To
help avoid injury to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can
start up and injure you even when
the engine is not running. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
{ CAUTION
• Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the
ground.
Things that burn can get on hot
engine parts and start a fire.
These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield
washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to
drop or spill things that will burn
onto a hot engine.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-11
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up
on the center of the hood, and
push the secondary hood release
to the right.
Pull the hood down to close. Lower
the hood until the lifting pressure
of the struts is reduced. Then allow
the hood to fall and latch into
place under its own weight. Check
to make sure the hood is closed.
If the hood does not fully latch,
gently push the hood down at the
front and center of the hood until it is
completely latched.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
3. After you have partially lifted the
hood, gas struts will automatically
take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly.
1. Pull the hood release handle with
this symbol on it. It is located
under the instrument panel
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-13
A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Engine Oil
“Checking Engine Oil” under
Checking Engine Oil
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.
page 5-19.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on
level ground.
C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir.
See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes
on page 5-27.
page 5-94.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
page 5-12 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
page 5-17.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Windshield
page 5-25.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If this is not done,
the oil dipstick might not show the
actual level.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the
tip down, and check the level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Service and Appearance Care
When to Add Engine Oil
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
on page 5-12 for the location of
the engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick,
add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
on page 5-98.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows
the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM Standard
GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
•
•
GM6094M
Engine Oil Additives / Engine
Oil Flushes
Use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM6094M.
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the starburst
symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed
for good performance and engine
protection.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils such
as SAE 20W-50.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −20°F
(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30
engine oil. Both provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. Always use an oil
that meets the required specification,
GM6094M. See “What Kind of
Engine Oil to Use” for more
•
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change
is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst symbol
on the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been
certified by the American
information.
Petroleum Institute (API).
properly, the system must be reset
every time the oil is changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Service and Appearance Care
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the
engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
The Engine Oil Life System
calculates when to change the
engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed,
reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required.
If a situation occurs where the oil
is changed prior to a CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message being
turned on, reset the system.
If the vehicle has Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
with the engine off.
2. Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE
If the vehicle does not have Driver
Information Center (DIC) buttons:
REMAINING displays.
3. Press and hold the set/reset
button until 100% is displayed.
Three chimes sound and
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with
the engine off. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) to access this
display. Press the trip odometer
reset stem until OIL LIFE
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message goes off.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the system is ever reset
REMAINING displays.
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last oil change. Remember
to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
2. Press and hold the trip
odometer reset stem until OIL
LIFE REMAINING shows 100%.
Three chimes sound and the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message goes off.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-17
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.
on page 6-3 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
on page 5-12 for the location of
the engine air cleaner/filter.
1. Loosen the screws that hold the
cover on.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle and
lightly shake the filter (away from
vehicle) to release loose dust and
dirt. If the filter remains caked with
dirt, a new filter is required.
3. Lift off the cover.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/
filter element and any loose
debris that may be found in the
air cleaner base.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Service and Appearance Care
5. Inspect or replace the air filter
element.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter
is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
Change the fluid at the intervals
listed in Additional Required Services
on page 6-6, and be sure to use
the transmission fluid listed in
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the cover and reconnect
the electrical connector.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid
may damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and
{ CAUTION
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. If it is not there and the
engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and
be careful working on the engine
with the air cleaner/filter off.
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level. A
transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,
take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
The transmission fluid will not
reach the end of the dipstick unless
the transmission is at operating
temperature. If you need to check the
transmission fluid level, please take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-19
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 30,000 miles
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
{ CAUTION
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
(50 000 km) or 24 months,
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. The coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fans
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
page 5-23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Service and Appearance Care
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
What to Use
{ CAUTION
Adding only plain water to the
cooling system can be dangerous.
Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water
or the wrong mixture, the engine
could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and
you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant.
•
•
•
Gives freezing protection
down to −34°F (−37°C), outside
temperature.
Gives boiling protection up
to 265°F (129°C), engine
temperature.
Notice: If extra inhibitors
and/or additives are used in the
vehicle’s cooling system, the
vehicle could be damaged. Use
only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this
manual for the cooling system.
information.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
•
•
Will not damage aluminum parts.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-21
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
{ CAUTION
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant recovery tank. If the
coolant inside the coolant recovery
tank is boiling, do not do anything
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
or above the FULL COLD mark, add
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before this
page 5-19 for more information.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant recovery tank cap has
this symbol on it.
When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be at or above
the FULL COLD line marked on the
recovery tank.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
When the engine is hot, the level
could be higher than the FULL COLD
line. If the coolant is below the FULL
COLD line when the engine is hot,
there could be a leak in the cooling
system.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at
the coolant recovery tank.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant
or take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer
for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Service and Appearance Care
2. Remove the radiator pressure
cap when the cooling system,
including the upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
How to Add Coolant to the
Radiator
CAUTION (Continued)
Wait for the cooling system and
surge tank pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
{ CAUTION
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full
turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left in
the system.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator,
but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
{ CAUTION
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the
surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the
surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
3. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
4. Fill the radiator to the base of the
filler neck with the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
5. When coolant begins to flow out
of the filler neck, reinstall the
pressure cap. Be sure to secure
it tightly.
1. Detach fasteners and lift off
the panel that covers the
radiator cap.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-23
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There is an engine coolant
temperature gage on the instrument
panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
the FULL COLD mark.
8. Start the engine and let it run
until the upper radiator hose
feels warm. Any time during this
procedure, watch out for the
engine cooling fan(s).
The vehicle may also display
an ENGINE OVERHEATED
IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant
recovery tank but leave the
radiator pressure cap off.
9. If the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck is low, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture through the
filler neck until the level is back
up to the base of the filler neck.
Replace the pressure cap.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when this warning appears, but
instead get service help right away.
on page 7-6.
Be sure to secure it tightly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Service and Appearance Care
If you do decide to lift the hood,
make sure the vehicle is parked
on a level surface.
If Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From
The Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when the vehicle:
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are
not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle
serviced.
{ CAUTION
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
•
•
•
•
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated, the
liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned.
Stop the engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to
N (Neutral), otherwise, shift
to the highest gear while
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
driving — D (Drive) or L (Low).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
Power Steering Fluid
5-25
If the temperature overheat gage is
no longer in the overheat zone or an
overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue
to drive the vehicle slow for about
10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle
distance from the car in front of you.
If the warning does not come back
on, continue to drive normally.
Overheated
Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode lets
the vehicle be driven to a safe place
in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists,
an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders
helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is a significant loss in
power and engine performance.
The temperature gage indicates an
overheat condition exists. Driving
extended distances and/or towing a
trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
The power steering fluid reservoir is
located toward the front of the engine
compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle. See Engine
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes
while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
When to Check Power
Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Service and Appearance Care
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
use the proper fluid.
When the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID
LOW ADD FLUID message will be
displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
information.
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
may damage the vehicle and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the correct fluid listed in
2. Remove engine oil fill cap.
3. Slide engine cover rearward and
lift to remove.
4. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
5. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
Windshield Washer Fluid
6. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
What to Use
7. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
When adding windshield washer
fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a
fluid that has sufficient protection
against freezing.
page 5-12 for reservoir location.
The fluid level should be somewhere
between MAX and MIN line on the
dipstick in room temperature. If the
fluid is on or below MIN line, you
should add fluid close to MAX Line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-27
Notice:
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding
fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid
is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new
brake linings are installed. Add or
remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
•
When using concentrated
Brake Fluid
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
•
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See
page 5-12 for the location of the
reservoir.
{ CAUTION
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn, if
the engine is hot enough. You or
others could be burned, and the
vehicle could be damaged. Add
brake fluid only when work is done
on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
•
•
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
•
•
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in your windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle’s windshield washer
system and paint.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic
system can also cause a low fluid
level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes will
not work well.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Service and Appearance Care
What to Add
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly
Brake Wear
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
damage brake hydraulic system
parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so
badly that they will have to be
replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir
cap and the area around the cap
before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION
•
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle’s painted surfaces, the
paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing
{ CAUTION
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could
result in costly brake repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
Battery
5-29
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when
the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
This vehicle has a maintenance free
battery. When it is time for a new
battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original
battery’s label.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent
The braking system on a vehicle
is complex. Its many parts have to
be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have
really good braking. The vehicle was
designed and tested with top-quality
brake parts. When parts of the
braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings
wear down and new ones are
installed — be sure to get new
approved replacement parts. If this
is not done, the brakes might
brake pulsation. When tires are
rotated, inspect brake pads for wear
and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
For battery replacement, see your
dealer/retailer or the service manual.
To purchase a service manual,
Warning: Battery posts, terminals,
and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a
sign that brake service might
be required.
not work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings
that are wrong for the vehicle, the
balance between the front and
rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance
expected can change in many other
ways if the wrong replacement
brake parts are installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Service and Appearance Care
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not work,
and it could damage the vehicle.
Vehicle Storage
{ CAUTION
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run
down, you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables
to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle.
It must have a 12-volt battery
with a negative ground system.
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting
on page 5-30 for tips on working
around a battery without
Notice: If the other vehicle’s
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can
burn you.
• They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is
driven infrequently, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This helps keep the battery
from running down.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it
could cause a ground connection
you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle, and
the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
• They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
Extended Storage: For extended
storage of the vehicle, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an
extended period of time.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-31
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or
3. Turn off the ignition on both
{ CAUTION
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use
a flashlight if you need more light.
a manual transmission in
Neutral before setting the parking
brake. If one of the vehicles is a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in Neutral.
Be sure the batteries have enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the ACDelco® battery
(or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be
present.
4. Open the hoods and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a
remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting
Notice: If you leave the radio or
other accessories on during
the jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off
terminal. See Engine
page 5-12 for more information
on the terminal locations.
the radio and other accessories
when jump starting the vehicle.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on you.
If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the
place with water and get medical
help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Service and Appearance Care
Before you connect the cables,
{ CAUTION
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a short
that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And
do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this
can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-33
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
The electrical connection is just
as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this
purpose.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
unpainted metal engine part, or to
a remote negative (−) terminal on
the vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from the
dead battery, but not near engine
parts that move.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Service and Appearance Care
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
1. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle that had
the dead battery.
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-35
All-Wheel Drive
It is recommended that the all-wheel
drive lubricants be checked and
filled by the dealer/retailer.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at
the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs
on page 5-37.
However, if your vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to
the low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at
you (for vertical aim).
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine how often to check
the lubricant. See Scheduled
If the headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommended that
you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Service and Appearance Care
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Halogen Bulbs
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps and
Sidemarker Lamps
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician service them.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps.
After your vehicle’s HID headlamp
bulb has been replaced, you
may notice that the beam is a
slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Taillamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
page 2-11.
2. Remove the convenience net, if
the vehicle has one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-37
3. Remove the two taillamp hex nut
covers.
4. Install the new bulb.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall
the license plate lamp.
4. Remove the two hex nuts
holding the taillamp assembly in
place.
1. Remove the two screws holding
each of the license plate lamps
to the liftgate trim.
Replacement Bulbs
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
6. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it.
Number
License Plate Lamp
194
Rear Sidemarker
Lamp
194
7. Replace the old bulb with a
new one.
Rear Turn Signal
and Taillamps
3157K
8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to
reinstall the taillamp assembly.
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, make sure the plastic
pin on the taillamp assembly
lines up and is inserted correctly
into the opening of the vehicle.
2. Turn and pull the license plate
lamp forward through the lift
gate trim opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Service and Appearance Care
Backglass Wiper Blade
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
To replace the backglass wiper
blade:
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking.
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly
away from the backglass.
The backglass wiper blade will
not lock in a vertical position
so care should be used when
pulling it away from the vehicle.
on page 6-3 for more information.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways. To replace the
wiper blade assembly:
2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly,
hold the wiper arm in position,
and push the blade away
1. Pull the windshield wiper
arm away from the
windshield.
2. Press the button in the middle of
the wiper arm connector and pull
the wiper blade away from the
arm connector.
from the wiper arm.
3. Replace the wiper blade.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade
assembly to the rest position on
the glass.
3. Install the new wiper blade and
make sure the wiper blade
locks into place.
For the proper size and type see
page 6-14.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-39
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about
your tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details.
For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
Tire pressure should be
checked when your
vehicle’s tires are cold.
See Inflation - Tire
• Overloading your
• Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If the tire’s
tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires
have been damaged,
replace them.
vehicle’s tires can cause
overheating as a result
of too much flexing.
You could have an air-out
and a serious accident.
on page 4-18.
• Underinflated tires
pose the same danger
as overloaded tires.
The resulting accident
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Service and Appearance Care
See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more
detail.
The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of
manufacture.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is
molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in the
sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Example
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support
that load.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a
combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire’s width, height,
aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-41
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type
(E) Tire Inflation: The
of cord and number of plies in the
sidewall and under the tread.
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Inflation - Tire
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The
compact spare tire or temporary
use tire has a tread life of
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support
that load.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
approximately 3,000 miles
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(5 000 km) and should not be
driven at speeds over 65 mph
(105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a
regular road tire has lost air and
gone flat. If your vehicle has a
compact spare tire, see Compact
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Size
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter
code is used to indicate the type
of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply
construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means
Accessory Weight: This means
the combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are,
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire’s height to its width.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the tire.
The load index represents the
load carry capacity a tire is
certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between the
plies and the tread. Cords may
be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-43
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
DOT Markings: A code
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
molded into the sidewall of
a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks
and some multipurpose
Cold Tire Pressure: The
passenger vehicles.
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-18.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle
Weight Rating for the front axle.
page 4-18.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard
and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
page 4-18.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Service and Appearance Care
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread remains.
manufacturer’s recommended
tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire’s traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating
the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-45
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
page 4-18.
A vehicle specific Tire and
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load
carrying capacity.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under-inflation or
over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Loading
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Loading
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air
(over-inflation), you can get
the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
• Needless damage from road
hazards
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Service and Appearance Care
When to Check
Remove the valve cap from
the tire valve stem. Press the
tire gage firmly onto the valve
to get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air
until you reach the recommended
amount.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires
and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to check
the compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional
information regarding the
compact spare tire, see Compact
How to Check
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gage to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are under-inflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with
the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-47
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is
When the malfunction indicator
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
properly.
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a
radio frequency and comply with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) operates on a radio
frequency and complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two
conditions:
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle
has one. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other than an
authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this
equipment.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-49
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather
when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive.
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are
getting low and need to be inflated
to the proper pressure.
Notice: Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the
GM approved tire sealant available
through your dealer/retailer.
When a low tire pressure condition is
detected, the TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster.
A Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and
the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they
are cold. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-18, for an example of the
Tire and Loading Information
label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
At the same time a message to
check the pressure in a specific tire
appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire
pressure warning light and the DIC
warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and
displays see DIC Operation and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Service and Appearance Care
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
•
The TPMS sensor matching
process was started but not
completed or not completed
successfully after rotating the
vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
•
•
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle’s original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The low tire warning
light and DIC warning message
come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
•
One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged. The
DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are
installed and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light
and DIC message comes on and
stays on.
•
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. The spare
tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message should go
off once you re-install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-51
You have two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than two minutes, to match
the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire
and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to
start over.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
5. Remove the valve cap from
the valve cap stem. Activate the
TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure
for five seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds
to sound, confirms that the sensor
identification code has been
matched to this tire and wheel
position.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time you
rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace
one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched
to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
6. Proceed to the passenger
side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to
ON/RUN with the engine off.
The TPMS sensors can also be
matched to each tire/wheel position
by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure. If increasing the
tire’s air pressure, do not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure
indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
7. Proceed to the passenger
side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
3. Press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCK
and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time for approximately
five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver
is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays on the DIC screen.
To decrease air-pressure out of
a tire you can use the pointed end
of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-52
Service and Appearance Care
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds
two times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
Tire Inspection and
Rotation
We recommend that you
regularly inspect the vehicle’s
tires, including the spare tire, if
the vehicle has one, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is
Time for New Tires on page 5-54
for more information.
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the
DIC display screen goes off.
Tires should be rotated every
5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000
to 13 000 km). See Scheduled
9. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure level
as indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
11. Put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.
If the vehicle has a compact
spare tire, do not include it in the
tire rotation.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-53
After the tires have been rotated,
adjust the front and rear inflation
pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on
the parts to which it is fastened,
can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel
could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or
In an emergency, you can use
a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or
dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
on page 5-98.
Make sure the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is stored
securely. Push, pull, and then
try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, tighten the cable.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-54
Service and Appearance Care
You need new tires if any of the
following statements are true:
With proper care and maintenance
tires typically wear out before
they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace
the tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more
information.
When It Is Time for New
Tires
•
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence
when you need new tires.
•
•
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system
rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same
TPC Spec rating. This way, your
vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
•
•
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or
other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over
time, even if they are not being
used. This is also true for the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including
temperatures, loading conditions,
and inflation pressure maintenance.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will appear when
the tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-55
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec
{ CAUTION
system considers over a dozen
critical specifications that
on page 5-52 for information on
proper tire rotation.
If you use bias-ply tires on the
vehicle, the wheel rim flanges
could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
impact the overall performance
of your vehicle, including
{ CAUTION
brake system performance, ride
and handling, traction control,
and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the
tire’s sidewall near the tire size.
If the tires have an all-season
tread design, the TPC Spec
number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire
Sidewall Labeling on page 5-40
for additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels. It is all right
to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your
vehicle. See Compact Spare
If you must replace your vehicle’s
tires with those that do not have
a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load
range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle
performing most like it did when
the tires were new. Replacing
less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an
inaccurate low-pressure warning
if non-TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-56
Service and Appearance Care
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that
is higher or lower than the proper
warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
page 5-46.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
{ CAUTION
If you add different sized
If you add wheels or tires that
are a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and
handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, anti-lock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and stability control, the
performance of these systems can
be affected.
wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and
suffer serious injury. Only use
Saturn specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a Saturn certified
technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information Label.
page 4-18, for more information
about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
on page 5-3 for additional
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-57
The grades are molded on the
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system does
not apply to deep tread,
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on
a specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well
on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and
climate.
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
limited-production tires.
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance.
This applies only to vehicles
sold in the United States.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-58
Service and Appearance Care
Traction – AA, A, B, C
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle
were aligned and balanced carefully
at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and
tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the
other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature – A, B, C
It should be noted that the
The temperature grades are
A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-59
If you need to replace any of your
wheels, wheel bolts or wheel
nuts, replace them only with new
Saturn original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
ground clearance, and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked or badly rusted or corroded.
If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these
conditions exist.
{ CAUTION
page 5-70 for more information.
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-60
Service and Appearance Care
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow
that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or
remove the device if it is contacting
the vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
Putting a used wheel on your
vehicle is dangerous. You cannot
know how it has been used or
how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-61
A rear blowout, particularly on a
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION
curve, acts much like a skid and may
require the same correction you
would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well
off the road if possible.
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain the tires properly. See
a tire, It is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the appropriate
safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle,
it is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything
else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. If a jack is provided
with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will
create a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place and stopping.
1. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. See Hazard Warning
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant
and compressor kit. To use the jack
and spare tire, see Changing a
tire sealant and compressor kit,
2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking
brake firmly and put the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-62
Service and Appearance Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
{ CAUTION
Over-inflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and
compressor kit instructions and
inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the
recommended pressure.
{ CAUTION
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire
is too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
{ CAUTION
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other equipment
in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and
Read and follow all of the tire sealant
and compressor kit instructions.
compressor kit in its original
location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Sealant
5-63
This vehicle may have one
of the following tire sealant and
compressor kits. The kit includes:
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered
to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters
are available at your local
dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister”
following.
A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
Air Only)
There is only enough sealant to
seal one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced.
See “Removal and Installation
of the Sealant Canister” following.
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gage
D. Pressure Deflation Button
(If equipped)
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-64
Service and Appearance Care
Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and
Inflate a Punctured Tire
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for 5 minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire faster.
Always do a safety check first.
page 5-61. Do not remove any
objects that have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Tire Sealant and
page 5-70.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-65
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
10. Inflate the tire to the
must be running while using
the air compressor.
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C).
The recommended inflation
pressure can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Inflation - Tire
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
Make sure the tire valve
stem is positioned close to the
ground so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
the flat tire by turning it
The pressure gage (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor
off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor
counterclockwise.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn
it clockwise until it is tight.
The pressure gage (C) will initially
show a high pressure while the
compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is
completely dispersed into the tire,
the pressure will quickly drop and
start to rise again as the tire
inflates with air only.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items
may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
from other accessory power
outlets. See Accessory Power
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-66
Service and Appearance Care
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11
under “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured).”
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F),
and the power plug (H) back in
their original location.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 10 psi (68 kPa) below
the recommended inflation
pressure, stop driving the
vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant
cannot seal the tire. See
The tire is not sealed and
will continue to leak air until
the vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire,
therefore, Steps 12 through 18
must be done immediately after
Step 11.
16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
to the recommended inflation
pressure, remove the maximum
speed label from the sealant
canister (E) and place it in a
highly visible location. The
label is a reminder not to exceed
55 mph (90 km/h) until the
damaged tire is repaired or
replaced.
on page 7-6.
Be careful while handling the tire
sealant and compressor kit as it
could be warm after usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-67
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the tire
to the recommended inflation
pressure.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer/retailer
within a 100 miles (161 km)
of driving to have the tire
repaired or replaced.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a
local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with local state
codes and practices.
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer/
retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-68
Service and Appearance Care
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only position.
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn
the compressor on.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C).
The recommended inflation
pressure can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Inflation - Tire
from other accessory power
outlets. See Accessory Power
Always do a safety check first. See
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Tire Sealant
page 5-70.
The pressure gage (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor
off to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using
the air compressor.
turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve
stem is positioned close to the
ground so the hose will reach it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-69
If you inflate the tire higher than
the recommended pressure
you can adjust the excess
pressure by pressing the
pressure deflation button (D),
if equipped, until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
14. Replace the air only hose (G)
Removal and Installation of
the Sealant Canister
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original location.
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
2. Press the canister release button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer/retailer.
hose (G).
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
5. Push the new canister into place.
Be careful while handling the tire
sealant and compressor kit as it
could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located
in a compartment on the bottom
of its housing that may be used to
inflate air mattresses, balls, etc.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (G)
from the tire valve stem, by
turning it counterclockwise, and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-70
Service and Appearance Care
2. Press the two tabs on the quick
release buckle to release the tire
sealant and compressor kit strap.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit Storage
The tire sealant and compressor
kit is located in the storage
compartment on the driver side,
at the rear of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Changing a tire can be
3. Remove the sealant and
compressor kit from its tray.
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in
P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
1. Press down on the latch tab and
pull the cover off to access the
storage compartment.
To be even more certain the
vehicle will not move, you should
put blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at
the opposite end of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-71
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by
turning it counterclockwise
Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools
The tools needed to remove the
spare tire are located in the storage
compartment on the driver side,
at the rear of the vehicle.
3. Push the jack (C) up out of the
holding bracket.
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the
bottom facing toward you.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
first.
1. Open the jack storage
compartment by pulling on the
latch tab, located toward the rear
of the vehicle, and pulling the
cover off.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to use the jack and change
a tire.
The tools you will be using include
the jack (A) and lug wrench (B).
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-72
Service and Appearance Care
D. Hoist Shaft
4. Turn the lug wrench
Removing the Spare Tire
counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground.
Continue turning the wrench
until the spare tire can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
E. Compact Spare Tire
F. Retainer
The compact spare tire is located
under the vehicle, in front of the rear
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-83 for more information
about the compact spare.
G. Hoist Shaft Assembly
1. Open the storage compartment
door of the convenience center
that is nearest the liftgate
and remove the cap on the
bottom of the storage
compartment.
2. Open the carpet cutout that is
located through the hole of the
storage compartment.
3. Attach the lug wrench into the
hoist shaft.
A. Rear Convenience Center
B. Lug Wrench
C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-73
3. Loosen the cable by turning the
wrench counterclockwise three
or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered,
tighten the cable all the way and
then loosen it at least two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the
ground, continue with Step 5
under “Removing the Spare
Tire (Vehicles with the Rear
Convenience Center)” listed
previously.
5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through
the wheel opening to remove the
spare tire from the cable.
If the spare tire will not lower, the
secondary latch could be engaged.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare
tire to the ground, see Secondary
Do the following to check the cable:
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the cable back up after
removing the spare tire.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if
the cable is visible.
Do not store a full-size or a flat
road tire under the vehicle.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the
cable by turning the lug wrench
clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot
over-tighten the cable.
To continue changing the flat tire,
page 5-74.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-74
Service and Appearance Care
Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See Changing a Flat
information.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,
loosen the plastic nut caps with
the wheel wrench. They will
not come off. Then, using the flat
end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the cover until
it comes off. Be careful; the
edges may be sharp. Do not try
to remove the cover with your
bare hands.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
not remove them — using the
lug wrench. For wheels with
a wheel lock key, use the wheel
lock key between the lock nut
and lug wrench. The key is
supplied in the front passenger
door pocket.
4. To identify the appropriate
jacking location, find the
triangle (A) about 12 inches
(30.5 cm) from the front tire
or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)
from the rear tire.
Store the wheel cover securely in
the rear of the vehicle until you
have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
The triangle is located near each
wheel on the vehicle’s exterior.
Notice: If this vehicle has wheel
locks and an impact wrench is
used to remove the wheel nuts,
the lock nut or wheel lock key
could be damaged. Do not use an
impact wrench to remove the
wheel nuts if this vehicle has
wheel locks.
If the vehicle has aluminum
wheels, remove the wheel nut
caps using the wheel wrench.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
{ CAUTION
5-75
Notice: If a jack is used to raise
the vehicle without positioning it
correctly, the vehicle could be
damaged. When raising the
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact
with the rear axle control arms.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage
the vehicle and even make the
vehicle fall. To help avoid
5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put
the compact spare tire near you.
personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{ CAUTION
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
6. Attach the lug wrench to the
jack, and turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the jack head
3 inches (7.6 cm).
7. Place the jack under the vehicle
as identified in Step 3. Raise the
vehicle by turning the lug wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground
so that there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit under the
wheel well.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-76
Service and Appearance Care
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
11. Place the spare tire on the
wheel mounting surface.
9. Remove the plastic spare tire
heat shield by pulling the rubber
latch. Store the plastic spare tire
heat shield. See Storing a Flat
12. Put the nuts on by hand by
turning the clockwise until
the wheel is held against the
mounting surface. Make
sure the rounded end is toward
the wheel.
page 5-80 for more information.
13. Lower the vehicle by attaching
the lug wrench to the jack
and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower
the jack completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-77
Notice: Improperly tightened
{ CAUTION
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification.
on page 5-98 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence, as shown.
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle’s compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-78
Service and Appearance Care
To release the spare tire from the
secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
This vehicle has an underbody
mounted tire hoist assembly that has
a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the compact spare
tire from suddenly falling off the
vehicle if the cable holding the spare
tire is damaged. For the secondary
latch to work, the tire must be
stowed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or
{ CAUTION
Someone standing too close
during the procedure could be
injured by the jack. If the spare
tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is
behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
under the spare.
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-80
for instructions on storing the
spare tire correctly.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown
2. Turn the lug wrench
counterclockwise until
1. If the cable is not visible, start
this procedure at Step 3.
approximately 6 inches (15 cm)
of cable is exposed.
{ CAUTION
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to
read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack
and raise the jack at least
10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the
vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift
point of the jack under the center
of the spare tire.
instructions listed next.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-79
5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to
raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through
the wheel opening when the
spare tire has been completely
lowered.
6. Keep raising the jack until the
spare tire stops moving upward
and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the
secondary latch has released
and the spare tire is balancing on
the jack.
10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise
to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging.
Have the hoist shaft assembly
inspected as soon as you can. You
will not be able to store a spare
tire using the hoist assembly until it
has been repaired or replaced.
8. Disconnect the lug wrench from
the jack and carefully remove
the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare tire while
firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the
other hand.
7. Lower the jack by turning the lug
wrench counterclockwise. Keep
lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-80
Service and Appearance Care
3. Slide the cable retainer through
the center of the wheel and start
to raise the compact spare tire.
Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Storing the Spare Tire
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
{ CAUTION
4. When the compact spare tire is
almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is
The underbody-mounted spare tire
needs to be stored with the valve
stem pointing down. If the spare
tire is stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, the secondary
latch will not work properly and
the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from the vehicle.
If this happened when the vehicle
was being driven, the tire might
contact a person or another
vehicle, causing injury and
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when
checking the air pressure in
the compact spare tire.
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the compact spare tire near
the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem down.
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle. Continue
turning the lug wrench until you
feel more than two clicks. This
indicates that the compact spare
tire is secure and the cable is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot
be overtightened.
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire
heat shield on the compact
spare tire.
damage to itself. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tire
is stored with the valve stem
pointing down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-81
Storing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the cable package from
the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage
area with the valve stem pointing
toward the rear of the vehicle.
6. Make sure the tire is stored
securely. Push, pull (A), and then
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the lug wrench to
tighten the cable.
5. Hook the cable onto the outside
portion of the liftgate hinges (B).
6. Hook the other end of the cable
onto the outside portion of the
liftgate hinge (A).
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it
is secure.
4. Pull the cable (A) through the
door striker (E), the center of the
wheel (D), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (C), as shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-82
Service and Appearance Care
Put back all tools as they were
stored in the jack storage
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
Storing the Tools
1. Ensure that the bottom of the
jack is facing toward you.
2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and
place down on the holding
bracket.
3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by
turning clockwise.
4. To replace the cover, line up the
tab at the front of the cover with
the notch in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place and make
sure that the rear clips are in the
slots and push the cover closed.
8. Make sure the metal tube is
centered at the striker. Push
the tube toward the front of the
vehicle.
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
9. Close the liftgate and make sure
it is latched properly.
Store the center cap or the plastic
bolt-on wheel covers until a full size
tire is put back on the vehicle. When
you replace the compact spare with
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on
wheel covers or the center cap.
Hand-tighten them over the wheel
nuts, using the lug wrench.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-83
is made to perform well at speeds up
to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances
up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the
full-size tire repaired or replaced at
your convenience. Of course, it is
best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire will last longer and
be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels
or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Compact Spare Tire
{ CAUTION
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system will be automatically disabled
when you use the compact spare.
To restore the AWD and prevent
excessive wear on the clutch in your
AWD, replace the compact spare
tire with a full-size tire as soon as
possible.
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails
which can damage the tire, wheel
and other parts of the vehicle.
The compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, however,
it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use
tire chains on the compact spare.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on
the vehicle, stop as soon as possible
and make sure the spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-84
Service and Appearance Care
When cleaning the vehicle’s
interior, only use cleaners specifically
designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may
result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not
intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces
immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth.
Many cleaners contain solvents that
may become concentrated in the
vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by
opening the vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue
to look its best if it is cleaned often.
Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet,
fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended
to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and
remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as
possible. The vehicle’s interior may
experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Products that remove odors from the
vehicle’s upholstery and clean the
vehicle’s glass can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to home
furnishings may also transfer color to
the vehicle’s interior.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-85
Do not clean the vehicle using:
3. Start on the outside edge of the
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a
soft brush attachment frequently
to remove dust and loose dirt.
A canister vacuum with a beater bar
in the nozzle may only be used on
floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it
first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using
one of the following techniques:
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
•
A knife or any other sharp object
to remove a soil from any interior
surface.
•
•
A stiff brush. It can cause damage
to the vehicle’s interior surfaces.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
area until the cleaning cloth
remains clean.
Heavy pressure or aggressive
rubbing with a cleaning cloth. Use
of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain
water.
•
Laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
•
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper towel.
Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be
removed.
If any of the soil remains, a
degreasers can leave residue
that streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)
of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or
spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first.
If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
•
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
•
•
Too much cleaner that saturates
the upholstery.
To clean:
Organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc. that can damage the
vehicle’s interior.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess
moisture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-86
Service and Appearance Care
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with
Instrument Panel, Vinyl,
and Other Plastic
Surfaces
water can be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather.
Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners
and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect leather may
permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by
A soft cloth dampened with water
may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION
and coatings that are sold to
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
preserve and protect soft plastic
surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended.
Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the
vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on
leather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-87
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
High pressure car washes may
Weatherstrips
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid
or abrasives, as they can damage
the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer/
retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions
and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm)
to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result
in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be required.
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the
vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by
washing it often.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-88
Service and Appearance Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive
and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take
their toll over a period of years.
To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Windshield, Backglass,
and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
and backglass with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when you clean the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned
regularly to keep their luster.
Washing with water is all that is
usually needed. However, chrome
polish may be used on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle’s finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Use special care with aluminum trim.
To avoid damaging protective trim,
never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for
all bright metal parts.
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-89
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and water.
Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because they could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
damaged if the vehicle is not
washed after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash the vehicle’s chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-90
Service and Appearance Care
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer/retailer
or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be Chemical Paint Spotting
corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s
Some weather and atmospheric
body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or replaced
to restore corrosion protection.
Underbody Maintenance
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts such
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they
have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining
the vehicle warranty.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or
12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-91
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the
glove box. It is very helpful if parts
need to be ordered. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification
Electrical System
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
High Voltage Devices and
Wiring
{ CAUTION
•
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Exposure to high voltage can
cause shock, burns, and even
death. The high voltage systems
in your vehicle can only be
serviced by technicians with
special training.
This is the legal identifier for the
vehicle. It appears on a plate in the
front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside
the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of
title and registration.
•
•
•
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special
equipment
High voltage devices are identified
by labels. Do not remove, open,
take apart, or modify these
devices. High voltage cable or
wiring has orange covering. Do not
probe, tamper with, cut, or modify
high voltage cable or wiring.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the
engine code. This code helps identify
the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and
vehicle’s engine code.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-92
Service and Appearance Care
Look at the silver-colored band
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Windshield Wiper Fuses
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is
protected by a circuit breaker and a
fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload
is caused by some electrical
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless you
check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment
can damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Fuses of the same amperage can be
temporarily borrowed from another
fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and
Other Power Options
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located under the instrument panel
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Pull down on the cover to access the
fuse block.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block
protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle’s battery, even if the vehicle
is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly
reduces the chance of fires caused
by electrical problems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-93
Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
BCK/UP/ Back-up
STOP
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Airbag
IADV/PWR/ Inadvertent
LED
Power LED
Amplifier
INFOTMNT Infotainment
Lamp/Stoplamp
Body Control
Module
Driver Side Turn
LT/TRN/SIG
MSM
Signal
BCM
Memory Seat
Module
Power Mirrors,
Liftgate Release
CNSTR/
VENT
CTSY
Canister Vent
PDM
Courtesy
Door Locks
Daytime Running
Lamps
GMC HID
Only/Rear Fog
Lamps-China Only
Display
Front Windshield
Washer
PWR
MODE
DR/LCK
Power Mode
DRL
PWR/MIR Power Mirrors
RDO Radio
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
DRL 2
Passenger Side
Turn Signal
Spare
RT/TRN/SIG
DSPLY
SPARE
SPARE
STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel
ILLUM Illumination
FRT/WSW
Spare
HTD/COOL Heated/Cooling
SEAT
Seats
Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
HVAC
Fuse Side
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-94
Service and Appearance Care
Underhood Fuse Block
Relays
Usage
PWR/
Power Windows
Relay
Power Steering
The underhood fuse block is located
in the engine compartment, on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
WNDW
PWR/
COLUMN Column Relay
L/GATE
LCK
Liftgate Relay
Power Lock Relay
Rear Window
Washer Relay
Power Unlock Relay
REAR/WSW
UNLCK
Daytime Running
Lamps 2 Relay
DRL2
Driver Side Unlock
Relay
LT/UNLCK
Daytime Running
Lamps Relay
Spare
DRL
Relay Side
SPARE
Lift the cover for access to the
fuse/relay block.
Front Windshield
Washer Relay
FRT/WSW
Relays
LT/PWR/ Driver Side Power
SEAT Seat Relay
RT/PWR/ Passenger Side
SEAT Power Seat Relay
Usage
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the
fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-95
Fuses
Usage
All-Wheel-Drive
System
AWD
BATT 1
BATT 2
BATT 3
Battery 1
Battery 2
Battery 3
Engine Control
Module
ECM
Engine Control
Module 1
ECM 1
EMISSION 1 Emission 1
EMISSION 2 Emission 2
EVEN
Even Injector Coils
COILS
FAN 1
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Fuses
A/C
CLUTCH Clutch
Usage
Air Conditioning
Fuses
AIRBAG
AUX
POWER
AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum
PUMP Pump
Usage
Airbag System
FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
Fuel System Control
Module
Horn
FSCM
HORN
Auxiliary Power
Antilock Braking
System (ABS) Motor
Adaptive Forward
Lighting System
ABS MTR
AFS
Heated Windshield
Washer Fluid
HTD WASH
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-96
Service and Appearance Care
Fuses
Usage
Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror
Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
Blower
Left High-Beam
Headlamp
Left Low-Beam
Headlamp
Left Parking Lamp
Trailer Left
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
Fuses
REAR
CAMERA
Usage
Fuses
Stop Lamps
(China
Only)
STRTR
Usage
Stop Lamps
HTD MIR
Rear Camera
(China Only)
Rear Accessory
Power Outlet
HVAC
BLWR
RR APO
Starter
Transmission
Control Module
Transmission
Trailer Back-up
Lamps
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger
TCM
LT HI
BEAM
LT LO
BEAM
LT PRK
Rear Climate
Control System
Right High-Beam
Headlamp
Right Low-Beam
Headlamp
RR HVAC
TRANS
TRLR
BCK/UP
RT HI
BEAM
RT LO
BEAM
TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
TRLR PRK Trailer Parking
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
RT PRK
Right Parking Lamp
LAMP
Lamps
Trailer Right
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
TRLR PWR Trailer Power
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
ODD
COILS
Odd Injector Coils
Windshield
Wiper/Washer
WPR/WSW
Powertrain Control
Module Ignition
PCM IGN
RVC SNSR
PWR
L/GATE
PWR
OUTLET
S/ROOF/
SUNSHADE
SPARE
Power Liftgate
Power Outlet
Sunroof
Spare
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Appearance Care
5-97
Relays
A/C
CMPRSR
CLTCH
Usage
Relays
Usage
Trailer Left
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum
PRK LAMP Park Lamp
PWR/TRN Powertrain
PUMP
CRNK
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 3
Pump
Switched Power
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Rear Window
Defogger
RR DEFOG
Trailer Right
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
FOG LAMP Fog Lamps
Stop Lamps
(China
Stop Lamps
(China Only)
High-Beam
Headlamps
HI BEAM
Only)
High Intensity
TRLR
BCK/UP
Trailer Back-up
Lamps
HID/LO
BEAM
Discharge (HID)
Low-Beam
WPR
Windshield Wiper
Headlamps
Windshield Wiper
High Speed
HORN
IGN
Horn
Ignition Main
WPR HI
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-98
Service and Appearance Care
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid*
Wheel Nut Torque
11.4 qt
5.5 qt
22.0 gal
5.3 qt
10.8 L
5.2 L
83.3 L
5.0 L
140 lb ft
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
D
Automatic
0.043 in (1.10 mm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-1
Your Vehicle and the
Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only
helps to keep the vehicle in good
working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper
vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe.
Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire
inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help
protect the environment, and to keep
the vehicle in good condition, be sure
to maintain the vehicle properly.
Maintenance
Schedule
Maintenance
Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the
proper level and change as
recommended.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections, replacement
parts, and recommended fluids
and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to
keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused
by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Maintenance Schedule
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Using the Maintenance
Schedule
{ CAUTION
•
carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
page 4-18.
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. In
trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment
for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
We want to help keep this vehicle in
good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it.
You might drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you
might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather.
You might use the vehicle in making
deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
•
•
are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See
The services in Scheduled
be performed when indicated.
information.
Because of all the different
ways people use their vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. You might
need more frequent checks and
replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive.
If you have any questions on how to
keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can
be complex. So, unless you are
technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer
for service, trained and supported
service technicians will perform
the work using genuine parts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-3
To purchase service information,
If the engine oil life system is ever
reset accidentally, service the vehicle
within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil
is changed. See Engine Oil Life
on the Engine Oil Life System and
resetting the system.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message displays,
service is required for the vehicle.
Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if driving under the best
page 6-9 tells what should be
checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep
the vehicle in good condition.
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once
a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians
who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services
are described in the following
for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that the first service
be Maintenance I, the second
service be Maintenance II, and then
alternate Maintenance I and
are listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12
vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be
replaced and all necessary repairs
done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend
the use of genuine parts from
your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance II thereafter. However,
in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance I — Use
Maintenance II — Use
Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was
Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the
message displays 10 months or
more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for
one year.
Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-10.
•
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-5
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (severe service).
See footnote (m).
•
•
•
•
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (normal service).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-7
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (k).
(b) Visually inspect front and rear
suspension and steering system for
damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have
them replaced if they are cracked,
swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace
with genuine parts as needed.
To help ensure proper operation, a
pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap and cleaning
the outside of the radiator and
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other
brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment.
air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Maintenance Schedule
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear,
cracking, or contamination. Clean
the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper
blades that are worn or damaged.
Replacement on page 5-38 and
Blades on page 5-88 for more
information.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
hood latch assemblies, secondary
latches, pivots, spring anchor
and release pawl, hood and door
hinges, rear folding seats, and
liftgate hinges. More frequent
lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on
(h) Change automatic transmission
fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the
outside temperature regularly
reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal
towing.
(e) Make sure the safety belt
reminder light and safety belt
assemblies are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see
on page 1-61.
better, and not stick or squeak.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle
system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level
checked. Add fluid if needed.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling
system. This service can be
complex; you should have your
dealer/retailer perform this service.
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
Engine Oil Level Check
6-9
(j) Check system for interference or
binding and for damaged or missing
parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not
lubricate accelerator or cruise control
cables.
Owner Checks and
Services
Notice: It is important to check
the engine oil regularly and keep it
at the proper level. Failure to keep
the engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to the engine
not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
These owner checks and services
should be performed at the intervals
specified to help ensure vehicle
safety, dependability, and emission
control performance. Your dealer/
retailer can assist with these checks
and services.
(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious
damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Check the engine oil level and
add the proper oil if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once. Whenever any
fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the
proper ones, as shown in
(l) If driving regularly under dusty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level
and add DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture if necessary. See Engine
(m) Change transfer case fluid if the
vehicle is mainly driven under
one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where
the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these
underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Level Check
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Check the windshield washer fluid
level in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
− When doing frequent trailer
towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi,
police, or delivery service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Maintenance Schedule
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System Check
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make
sure they are inflated to the
correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire, if the vehicle
has one. See Inflation - Tire
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
When you are doing this
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could move
suddenly. If the vehicle moves,
you or others could be injured.
inspection, the vehicle could move
suddenly. If the vehicle moves,
you or others could be injured.
vehicle has a spare tire, check to
make sure it is stored securely. See
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for
high mileage highway drivers prior to
the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for
wear and, if necessary, rotate the
tires. See Tire Inspection and
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it starts.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN, but do not
start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Try to start the engine in
each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-11
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park)
Mechanism Check
•
To check the P (Park)
mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
{ CAUTION
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
•
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
Underbody Flushing Service
•
The ignition key should come out
only in LOCK/OFF.
At least every spring, use plain water
to flush any corrosive materials from
the underbody. Take care to clean
thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
Contact your dealer/retailer if
service is required.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit, check the sealant
expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the kit at least
once a year. See your dealer/retailer
for a replacement canister.
•
To check the parking brake’s
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock Cylinders
Carrier Assembly — Differential (Rear
Drive Module) and Transfer Case
(Power Transfer Unit)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges and Rear
Folding Seat
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
15278634
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
—
89017524
PF48
41-107
Spark Plugs
12611882
Wiper Blades
Driver – 24.6 in (62.5 cm)
15254805
15254804
15276259
—
—
—
Passenger – 20.8 in (53.0 cm)
Rear – 11.6 in (30.0 cm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
and Information
Customer
Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your retailer and to
Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before,
during, and after the purchase
of a Saturn vehicle, for total
customer satisfaction. We call this
the Saturn Difference. Normally,
any concerns with the sales
Customer Assistance and
Information
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
transaction or the operation of the
vehicle are resolved by the retailer’s
sales or service departments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Customer Assistance Information
If, for any reason, your ownership
experience falls below your
expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free
number in order to give your inquiry
prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):
Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn
vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the
additional assistance of a neutral
party through our voluntary
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail
Customer Assistance Liaison. Any
member of the retail management
team has the authority and the
desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly
resolved at this level.
•
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This 17-digit number can
be found on the vehicle
registration or title, on the upper
driver side corner of the
instrument panel, or on your
roadside assistance key card.
participation in a mediation/
arbitration program called Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
STEP TWO: Should you need
additional assistance, in the U.S.,
contact the Saturn Customer
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is
available at no cost to you, our
customer.
•
•
•
The name of your selling and
servicing retail facility.
Assistance Center by calling
Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage.
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn
Customer Assistance Center team
member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest
retailer location, roadside assistance,
brochures, literature and discuss any
concerns you may have.
Your daytime and evening phone
numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you
follow Step One first.
Although you may be required
to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is
free of charge and your case is
generally heard within 40 days.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-3
If you do not agree with the decision
given in your case, you can reject it
and proceed with any other venue for
relief available to you.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you
may write to:
General Motors Participation in
the Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your
concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to
binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party
arbiter, and may include an informal
hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the
entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program
by using the toll-free telephone
number or by writing them at the
following address:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
informal, quick, and free of charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Customer Assistance Information
Other Helpful Links:
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have access to:
Online Owner Center
Saturn — www.saturn.com
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/
saturn
•
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Saturn Merchandise —
www.saturncollection.com
Information and services customized
for your specific vehicle — all in
one convenient place.
Help Center —
www.saturn.com/helpcenter
•
My Dealers/Retailers: Save
details such as address and
phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
•
•
FAQ
•
•
•
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more
Contact Us
•
•
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values, or schedule
a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
My GM Canada (Canada) —
www.gm.ca
Online service and maintenance
records
My GM Canada is a
Find Saturn retailers for service
nationwide
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
•
•
Exclusive privileges and offers
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle
•
OnStar® and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gm.ca.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-5
In Canada, write to:
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Saturn has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment in
its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
Customer Assistance
Offices
Saturn encourages customers to
call the toll-free number for
assistance. If a customer wishes to
write to Saturn, the letter should
be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
GMcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33173
Detroit, MI 48232-5173
Any hearing or speech-impaired
customer who has access to a TDD
or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.
TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-553-6000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Customer Assistance Information
For more details, or to determine
your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
Calling for Assistance
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information ready:
•
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
•
Telephone number of your
location
In Canada, customers may call
the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
•
•
Location of the vehicle
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for your
vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
•
•
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
Description of the problem
The offer is available for a limited
period of time from the date of
vehicle purchase/lease.
For Canadian purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-7
Coverage
Services Provided
•
Flat Tire Change: Service is
provided to change a flat tire with
the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good
condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
•
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for
the vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Services are provided up to
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
•
Lock-Out Service: Service is
provided to unlock the vehicle if
you are locked out. A remote
unlock may be available if you
have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present
identification before this service
is given.
•
•
Battery Jump Start: Service is
provided to jump start a dead
battery.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Trip Interruption Benefits
and Assistance: If your trip is
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during
the 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are
hotel, meals, and rental car.
•
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud, or snow.
Saturn and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made
many times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Customer Assistance Information
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
•
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three weeks
for delivery.
•
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
•
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
Assistance advisor may give you
permission to get local emergency
road service. You will receive
payment, up to $100, after
sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical
failures may be covered, however
any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the
warranty are the owner
•
•
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains,
or other traction devices.
•
Trip Interruption Benefits
and Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometres from where your
trip was started to qualify. General
Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
•
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
responsibility.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
•
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
•
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
Transportation Options
7-9
Scheduling Service
Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer/retailer
and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize
your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable to wait,
Saturn helps to minimize your
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on
the circumstances, your retailer can
offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the Bumper
to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada), extended
powertrain, and hybrid specific
warranties in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Shuttle Service
If your vehicle cannot be
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist
in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep
driving it until it can be scheduled
for service, unless, of course, the
problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for
instructions.
Transportation. Retailers may
provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily
schedule. This includes one-way or
round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance
parameters of the retailer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you
are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow
for the same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Customer Assistance Information
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program
Information
Your retailer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
All program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please
contact your retailer for specific
information about availability.
All Courtesy Transportation
transportation is used instead of the
retailer’s shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by Saturn
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your
arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Saturn reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions
described herein at its sole
discretion.
retailer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-11
Recycled original equipment parts
Aftermarket collision parts are
also available. These are made
Collision Damage Repair
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice
to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your
vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in
subsequent collisions. Aftermarket
parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision
parts are your best choice to ensure
that your vehicle’s designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your
GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able
to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
Here is what to do if you are
involved in a crash.
•
Check to make sure that you are
all right. If you are uninjured,
make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
•
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help.
Do not leave the scene of a crash
until all matters have been taken
care of. Move your vehicle only if
its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your
GM vehicle with comprehensive
and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in
the quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
•
Give only the necessary and
requested information to police
and other parties involved in
the crash. Do not discuss your
personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to
the crash. This will help guard
against post-crash legal action.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-13
company and policy number, and
a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
•
•
If you need roadside assistance,
call GM Roadside Assistance.
information.
•
Once you have an estimate, read
it carefully and make sure you
understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you
have a question, ask for an
explanation. Reputable shops
welcome this opportunity.
•
If possible, call your insurance
company from the scene of the
crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need.
If they ask for a police report,
phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next
day and you can get a copy of the
report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault”
insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and
both vehicles are driveable.
If your vehicle cannot be driven,
know where the towing service
will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write
down the driver’s name, the
service’s name, and the phone
number.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a
pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not
be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
•
•
Remove any valuables from your
vehicle before it is towed away.
Make sure this includes your
insurance information and
registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
•
Choose a reputable collision
repair facility for your vehicle.
Whether you select a dealer/
retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make
sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to
feel comfortable with their work
for a long time.
Gather the important information
you will need from the other
driver. Things like name, address,
phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate,
vehicle make, model and model
year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Customer Assistance Information
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially
value the repair using aftermarket
parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle
is leased you may be obligated to
have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the
full cost.
of vehicles, it could order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
If another party’s insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on
that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have
no contractual limits with that
company. In such cases, you can
have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from Safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it could open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications
to the Canadian
Government
to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, please notify Saturn.
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to
notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
A variety of publications are
available to you. Saturn service
manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases,
specialized tools and equipment
are necessary to complete certain
repairs. However, the manuals
are available to owners who either
have the training, or wish to
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
Transport Canada
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999,
or write:
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
For additional publications
information or to order publications
in the United States, call toll
free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
Saturn-publications.com to order
on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals
are available by calling toll free
1-800-551-4123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Customer Assistance Information
Bulletins cover various subjects.
Some pertain to the proper use and
care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on
time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
Owner Publications
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and
deploy airbags in a crash and, if so
equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to
help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
Information on how to obtain product
bulletins and as described below is
applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and
only for cars and light trucks with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds
(4 536 kg). Copies of individual
bulletins are also at your participating
Saturn retailer. You can ask to
see them.
Some bulletins tell a technician how
to repair a new or unexpected
condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can
help a technician service your
vehicle better.
In Canada, information relating to
product service bulletins can
be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Most bulletins apply to conditions
affecting a small number of vehicles.
Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine
if a specific bulletin applies to your
vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at
1-800-2-SATURN or visit
saturn-publications.com to order
online.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers
useful service bulletins about Saturn
products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then
prepare bulletins for servicing
our products better. You can get
these bulletins, too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information
7-17
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Saturn will not access this data or
share it with others except: with
the consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part of
Saturn’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or,
as required by law. Data that Saturn
collects or receives may also be
used for Saturn research needs or
may be made available to others
for research purposes, where
a need is shown and the data is not
tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event
Data Recorder (EDR). The main
purpose of an EDR is to record,
in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However,
other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
•
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
•
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
•
•
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Customer Assistance Information
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as
tire pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data
for more information.
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
Saturn vehicles does not use
or record personal information or
link with any other Saturn system
containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Circuit Breakers ................... 5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Fuel (cont.)
F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
High Voltage Devices and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Locks (cont.)
Power Door ....................... 2-8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Theft-Deterrent Feature ....... 3-125
Tires (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Windshield (cont.)
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|